Table of Contents

Basic Operation 1
Assistance 2
SICAM
Projects 3
Logic Editor A8000
Signals and Settings 4
V03.80 Configuring Function Charts (CFC) 5
Configuring CFC Trend View 6
Help
Customizing Trend View Display 7
Configuring User-Defined Function Blocks 8
Data Types and Data Structures 9
Instructions (Blocks) 10
Documentation 11
Project 12
Function Charts (CFC) 13
Analyzing Function Charts (CFC) 14
SICAM A8000 Devices 15
Redundancy 16
User Interface 17
Index
 NOTE

i For your own safety, observe the warnings and safety instructions contained in this document, if available.
Table of Contents

1 Basic Operation.......................................................................................................................................... 11
1.1 Getting to Know the User Interface....................................................................................12
1.1.1 User Interface.............................................................................................................. 12
1.1.2 Project Tree................................................................................................................. 13
1.1.3 Working Area...............................................................................................................16
1.1.4 Inspector Window........................................................................................................16
1.1.5 Task Card.................................................................................................................... 16
1.1.6 Editor Window.............................................................................................................18
1.1.7 Object Bar................................................................................................................... 19
1.2 Adjusting View of User Interface and Contents.................................................................. 19
1.2.1 Adjusting Working Area............................................................................................... 19
1.2.2 Adjusting Rows and Columns....................................................................................... 20
1.2.3 Sorting Column Content.............................................................................................. 23
1.2.4 Filtering Column Content.............................................................................................23

2 Assistance................................................................................................................................................... 24
2.1 Overview on the Logic Editor Information System..............................................................25
2.2 Using Logic Editor Help..................................................................................................... 25
2.3 Icons in the Info Tab..........................................................................................................27
2.4 Copying and Deleting Messages........................................................................................ 27

3 Projects....................................................................................................................................................... 29
3.1 Managing Projects............................................................................................................ 30
3.1.1 Overview of Projects.................................................................................................... 30
3.1.2 Opening a Project........................................................................................................ 30
3.1.3 Saving a Project........................................................................................................... 30
3.1.4 Closing a Project.......................................................................................................... 30
3.1.5 Deleting a Project........................................................................................................ 31
3.1.6 Printing Project Data.................................................................................................... 31

4 Signals and Settings................................................................................................................................... 32

4.1 Overview of Signals...........................................................................................................33
4.2 Working with the Signal Catalog........................................................................................33
4.2.1 Overview of the Signal Catalog.................................................................................... 33
4.2.2 Open the Signal Catalog and Adjust View.....................................................................33
4.2.3 Selecting a Signal Element in the Signal Catalog...........................................................34

5 Configuring Function Charts (CFC).............................................................................................................37

5.1 Brief Introduction to Function Charts (CFC)........................................................................38
5.1.1 Meaning of CFC........................................................................................................... 38

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 3

, Edition 02.2022
Table of Contents

5.1.2 Extended Processing....................................................................................................38

5.1.3 Function Chart.............................................................................................................39
5.1.4 Block........................................................................................................................... 39
5.1.5 Configuration Strategy................................................................................................ 40
5.1.6 Flow Model................................................................................................................. 41
5.1.7 Naming Conventions................................................................................................... 44
5.2 Managing Function Charts................................................................................................ 44
5.2.1 Adding a CFC...............................................................................................................44
5.2.2 Opening a CFC.............................................................................................................45
5.2.3 Renaming a Function Chart (CFC)................................................................................ 46
5.2.4 Copying a CFC ............................................................................................................ 46
5.2.5 Deleting CFCs.............................................................................................................. 47
5.2.6 Switching between Control Flow and Data Flow...........................................................48
5.2.7 Printing a CFC..............................................................................................................49
5.2.8 Creating CFCs Automatically (ACG).............................................................................. 50
5.3 Adjusting Function Chart and Chart View...........................................................................53
5.3.1 Adjusting the Layout in the CFC Data Flow View .......................................................... 53
5.3.2 Scaling the View.......................................................................................................... 54
5.3.3 Overview of Sheet Bars................................................................................................ 55
5.3.4 Adjusting Sheet Bars.................................................................................................... 57
5.3.5 Showing and Hiding the Grid....................................................................................... 59
5.4 Adding and Processing Elements in the Function Chart...................................................... 59
5.4.1 Basic Instructions.........................................................................................................59
5.4.2 Adding a Block in a CFC................................................................................................60
5.4.3 Renaming a Block........................................................................................................ 61
5.4.4 Copying a Block........................................................................................................... 62
5.4.5 Adding and Editing a Text Box in a CFC in the Data Flow View...................................... 63
5.4.6 Aligning Elements in the Data Flow View in the CFC .................................................... 64
5.4.7 Deleting Elements from the CFC.................................................................................. 65
5.5 Interconnection of Blocks in the Data Flow View................................................................ 65
5.5.1 Displaying Interconnections.........................................................................................65
5.5.2 Interconnecting Blocks ................................................................................................66
5.5.3 Interconnecting a Block with a Signal...........................................................................68
5.5.4 Negating a Block Input.................................................................................................70
5.5.5 Changing Block Interconnections................................................................................. 71
5.5.6 Deleting a Block Interconnection..................................................................................71
5.5.7 Displaying the Interconnections of a Block................................................................... 72
5.5.8 Showing/Hiding Block Connections.............................................................................. 72
5.5.9 Setting Parameters for Block Connections.................................................................... 73
5.5.10 Converting Data Types.................................................................................................75
5.5.11 Inter-Chart Connection (ICC)........................................................................................ 75
5.6 Forcing of a Block IO......................................................................................................... 76
5.6.1 Forcing Single Block IO Inputs and Outputs.................................................................. 76
5.6.2 Forcing Multiple Block IO Inputs and Outputs............................................................... 76
5.7 User Interface................................................................................................................... 77
5.7.1 Adjusting the Running Sequence of Blocks................................................................... 77

4 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
 Table of Contents

5.7.2 Optimizing the Running Sequence Automatically......................................................... 78

5.8 Checking and Finishing Function Chart..............................................................................79
5.8.1 Checking Consistency.................................................................................................. 79
5.8.2 Compiling the CFC....................................................................................................... 79
5.8.3 Bumpless Reload......................................................................................................... 80
5.9 CFC-Plan Access Protection................................................................................................80

6 Configuring CFC Trend View...................................................................................................................... 82

6.1 Brief Introduction to CFC Trend View................................................................................. 83
6.2 Adding a Trend Display......................................................................................................84
6.3 Adding a Dynamic Display................................................................................................. 84
6.4 Adding Analog Axis in the Trend Display Editor.................................................................. 85
6.5 Adding a Digital Axis in the Trend Display Editor................................................................ 86
6.6 Assigning Analog IO Terminals of a CFC Block to a Trend Display........................................86
6.7 Assigning Digital IO Terminals of a CFC Block to a Trend Display.........................................87
6.8 Assigning IO Terminals between Trend Displays.................................................................88
6.9 Assigning IO Terminals between Trend Displays via Project Tree.........................................89
6.10 Assigning IO Terminals of a CFC block to the Dynamic Display Editor..................................90
6.11 Deleting CFC Block/CFC Chart after Assigning their Terminals to the Trend Display/
Dynamic Display Editor......................................................................................................91
6.12 Watching Values in Trend/Dynamic Display while CFC Online Analysis (Monitoring)
is in Progress.....................................................................................................................91
6.13 Watching Values in the Trend/Dynamic Display while CFC Offline Analysis is in Progress..... 93

7 Customizing Trend View Display................................................................................................................ 94

7.1 Overview of Customization............................................................................................... 95
7.2 Renaming Axis in the Trend Display................................................................................... 95
7.3 Changing the Color of the Trend in the Trend View Display ............................................... 95
7.4 Zooming Trend View Vertically and Horizontally................................................................ 96
7.5 Deleting Trend Display from the Project Tree..................................................................... 96
7.6 Printing the Trend View Graph...........................................................................................96
7.7 Exporting the Trend View ................................................................................................. 97
7.8 Importing the Trend View..................................................................................................97

8 Configuring User-Defined Function Blocks................................................................................................ 99

8.1 Brief Introduction to User-Defined Function Blocks.......................................................... 100
8.2 Adding a User-Defined Function Block............................................................................. 100
8.3 Opening a User-Defined Function Block........................................................................... 100
8.4 Defining the Interfaces of a User-Defined Function Block................................................. 101
8.5 Importing Inputs and Outputs in UFB Interfaces...............................................................103
8.6 Defining User-Defined Function Block Interfaces of STRUCT Type..................................... 106
8.7 Analyzing User-Defined Function Blocks.......................................................................... 107
8.8 Modifying a User-Defined Function Block.........................................................................108
8.9 Structured Text (ST) UFBs................................................................................................ 109
8.10 Special Data Types in ST Code..........................................................................................111
8.10.1 Data Type STRUCT as Interface Variable for ST UFB..................................................... 111

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 5

, Edition 02.2022
Table of Contents

8.10.2 Data Type STRUCT as Local Variable within an ST UFB................................................. 112

8.10.3 Data Type ARRAY as Local Variable within an ST UFB.................................................. 113
8.10.4 Data Type LREAL as Local Variable within an ST UFB................................................... 113
8.11 ST Code – Supported Instruction Set acc. to IEC 61131-3................................................. 113
8.12 ST Code – Supported Notations with Examples................................................................ 114
8.13 ST Code – Variables: Initialize, Retain, and Const..............................................................115
8.14 UFB Access Protection..................................................................................................... 115

9 Data Types and Data Structures............................................................................................................... 117

9.1 Basic Data Types............................................................................................................. 118
9.2 Structure Data Types According to IEC 60870-5-104........................................................ 119
9.3 Generic Data Types......................................................................................................... 119
9.4 User-Defined Structures.................................................................................................. 119
9.5 User-Defined Libraries..................................................................................................... 120

10 Instructions (Blocks)................................................................................................................................. 122

10.1 Logic...............................................................................................................................123
10.1.1 BOOL.........................................................................................................................123
10.1.1.1 OR....................................................................................................................... 123
10.1.1.2 XOR..................................................................................................................... 123
10.1.1.3 NOR..................................................................................................................... 124
10.1.1.4 AND.....................................................................................................................125
10.1.1.5 NAND.................................................................................................................. 125
10.1.1.6 NOT..................................................................................................................... 126
10.1.2 WORD....................................................................................................................... 126
10.1.2.1 AND_DW..............................................................................................................126
10.1.2.2 NAND_DW........................................................................................................... 127
10.1.2.3 OR_DW................................................................................................................ 127
10.1.2.4 XOR_DW.............................................................................................................. 128
10.1.2.5 NOR_DW.............................................................................................................. 128
10.1.2.6 NOT_DW.............................................................................................................. 129
10.1.2.7 SHL_DW............................................................................................................... 129
10.1.2.8 SHR_DW...............................................................................................................129
10.1.2.9 ROL_DW...............................................................................................................130
10.1.2.10 ROR_DW.............................................................................................................. 130
10.1.2.11 MERGE_DW..........................................................................................................131
10.1.2.12 SPLIT_DW.............................................................................................................131
10.2 Arithmetic.......................................................................................................................132
10.2.1 ABS........................................................................................................................... 132
10.2.2 ADD.......................................................................................................................... 132
10.2.3 DIV............................................................................................................................ 133
10.2.4 MOD......................................................................................................................... 133
10.2.5 MUL.......................................................................................................................... 134
10.2.6 SUB........................................................................................................................... 135
10.3 Compare.........................................................................................................................135
10.3.1 LT..............................................................................................................................135
10.3.2 LIMIT......................................................................................................................... 136
10.3.3 LE..............................................................................................................................137
10.3.4 GE............................................................................................................................. 137
10.3.5 GT............................................................................................................................. 138
10.3.6 EQ.............................................................................................................................139

6 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
 Table of Contents

10.3.7 NE............................................................................................................................. 140

10.3.8 LIMIT_UPPER_HYS ..................................................................................................... 141
10.3.9 LIMIT_LOWER_HYS ....................................................................................................141
10.4 Timer and Counter.......................................................................................................... 141
10.4.1 TOF........................................................................................................................... 141
10.4.2 TON.......................................................................................................................... 142
10.4.3 TP..............................................................................................................................143
10.4.4 BLINK........................................................................................................................ 144
10.4.5 CTD........................................................................................................................... 145
10.4.6 CTU........................................................................................................................... 146
10.4.7 CTUD.........................................................................................................................147
10.5 Flip-Flops........................................................................................................................ 148
10.5.1 SR............................................................................................................................. 148
10.5.2 RS............................................................................................................................. 149
10.6 Edge Detection............................................................................................................... 149
10.6.1 R_TRIG.......................................................................................................................149
10.6.2 F_TRIG.......................................................................................................................150
10.7 Selection.........................................................................................................................150
10.7.1 MIN........................................................................................................................... 150
10.7.2 MAX.......................................................................................................................... 151
10.7.3 MUX..........................................................................................................................152
10.7.4 SEL............................................................................................................................153
10.7.5 MOVE_B.................................................................................................................... 153
10.7.6 MOVE_D....................................................................................................................154
10.7.7 MOVE_R.................................................................................................................... 154
10.7.8 MOVE........................................................................................................................154
10.7.9 MOVE_T.................................................................................................................... 155
10.7.10 MOVE_S.................................................................................................................... 155
10.7.11 MOVE_DW.................................................................................................................155
10.8 Power and Exponent....................................................................................................... 156
10.8.1 LOG...........................................................................................................................156
10.8.2 LN............................................................................................................................. 156
10.8.3 EXP........................................................................................................................... 157
10.8.4 EXPT..........................................................................................................................157
10.8.5 SQRT......................................................................................................................... 158
10.9 Trigonometry..................................................................................................................158
10.9.1 SIN............................................................................................................................ 158
10.9.2 ASIN..........................................................................................................................158
10.9.3 COS...........................................................................................................................159
10.9.4 ACOS.........................................................................................................................159
10.9.5 TAN...........................................................................................................................160
10.9.6 ATAN.........................................................................................................................160
10.10 Conversion..................................................................................................................... 161
10.10.1 ANY_TO_D.................................................................................................................161
10.10.2 ANY_TO_B................................................................................................................. 161
10.10.3 ANY_TO_R................................................................................................................. 161

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 7

, Edition 02.2022
Table of Contents

10.10.4 ANY_TO_T................................................................................................................. 162

10.10.5 ANY_TO_DW..............................................................................................................162
10.10.6 SPLIT_IEC60870DT.....................................................................................................162
10.10.7 MERGE_IEC60870DT..................................................................................................163
10.11 Extended........................................................................................................................ 164
10.11.1 DEADZONE_HYS ....................................................................................................... 164
10.11.2 PIDT1 Controller........................................................................................................ 164
10.11.3 PT1_CONTROLLER ..................................................................................................... 165
10.11.4 CONTROL_PULLUP .................................................................................................... 166
10.11.5 Curves....................................................................................................................... 166
10.12 Target System................................................................................................................. 169
10.12.1 SET_DIAG_ERROR ......................................................................................................169
10.12.2 SET_DIAG_WARNING .................................................................................................169
10.12.3 GENERAL_INTERROG_SEND........................................................................................169
10.12.4 COUNTER_INTERROG_SEND....................................................................................... 170
10.12.5 COUNTER_INTERROG_REC..........................................................................................171
10.12.6 IECCMD_SET_CTRLLOC...............................................................................................172

11 Documentation.........................................................................................................................................174
11.1 Document - General........................................................................................................ 175
11.2 Text Box – General.......................................................................................................... 175
11.3 Text - View......................................................................................................................176
11.4 Printing Data...................................................................................................................177
11.4.1 Starting the Printing.................................................................................................. 177
11.4.2 Determining the Scope of Printing............................................................................. 178
11.4.3 Selecting Print Options.............................................................................................. 178
11.4.4 Print Options............................................................................................................. 179
11.5 Using Print Preview......................................................................................................... 180
11.5.1 Overview of the Print Preview.................................................................................... 180
11.5.2 Opening the Print Preview......................................................................................... 180
11.5.3 Selecting Preview Options......................................................................................... 181
11.5.4 Scaling a View........................................................................................................... 181
11.5.5 Navigating in the Print Preview.................................................................................. 183
11.5.6 Starting the Printout.................................................................................................. 184

12 Project.......................................................................................................................................................185
12.1 User Information.............................................................................................................186
12.2 Project Conversion.......................................................................................................... 186

13 Function Charts (CFC)............................................................................................................................... 187

13.1 Function Chart – General................................................................................................ 188
13.2 Time Stamp.................................................................................................................... 188
13.3 Sheet Bars/Layout........................................................................................................... 189
13.4 Advanced........................................................................................................................190
13.5 Text Box – General.......................................................................................................... 190
13.6 Text Box – Background....................................................................................................190
13.7 Text................................................................................................................................ 191

8 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
 Table of Contents

13.8 Block – General Properties...............................................................................................191

13.9 Interface......................................................................................................................... 192
13.10 Invisible Interconnections................................................................................................193
13.11 Terminal – General..........................................................................................................194
13.12 Interconnection.............................................................................................................. 196
13.13 Signal – General..............................................................................................................196

14 Analyzing Function Charts (CFC).............................................................................................................. 198

14.1 Analyzing Function Charts (CFC)......................................................................................199

15 SICAM A8000 Devices............................................................................................................................... 202

15.1 Configuring SICAM A8000 Devices.................................................................................. 203
15.1.1 SICAM CP-8000, CP-8021, CP-8022............................................................................ 203
15.1.2 SICAM CP-8050, CP-8031...........................................................................................204
15.2 Testing SICAM A8000 Devices......................................................................................... 205
15.2.1 Testing Signals (Forcing)............................................................................................205
15.2.2 Testing Actions in Synchronized and Non-Synchronized State.....................................209
15.2.3 SICAM CP-8000, CP-8021, CP-8022............................................................................ 211
15.2.3.1 Testing Input Wiring.............................................................................................211
15.2.3.2 Testing Charts...................................................................................................... 214
15.2.3.3 Testing Output Wiring.......................................................................................... 216
15.2.4 SICAM CP-8050, CP-8031...........................................................................................218
15.2.4.1 Testing Input Wiring.............................................................................................218
15.2.4.2 Testing Charts...................................................................................................... 220
15.2.4.3 Testing Output Wiring.......................................................................................... 221

16 Redundancy.............................................................................................................................................. 224
16.1 Display of Redundant Devices..........................................................................................225
16.2 Possible Operations of Redundant Devices/Resources.......................................................226

17 User Interface........................................................................................................................................... 230

17.1 Editors............................................................................................................................ 231
17.1.1 Function-Chart (CFC) Editor....................................................................................... 231
17.1.2 Data Flow ................................................................................................................. 231
17.1.3 Control Flow..............................................................................................................232
17.1.4 Trend Display Editor ..................................................................................................233
17.1.5 Dynamic Display Editor.............................................................................................. 237
17.2 Tabs in the Task Area...................................................................................................... 238
17.2.1 Libraries.................................................................................................................... 238
17.2.2 Signals...................................................................................................................... 239
17.2.3 Variables................................................................................................................... 239
17.2.4 Testing...................................................................................................................... 241
17.2.5 Instructions............................................................................................................... 242
17.3 Entry, Selection, and Display Areas.................................................................................. 244
17.3.1 Info........................................................................................................................... 244
17.3.2 General..................................................................................................................... 244
17.3.3 Compile.....................................................................................................................245
17.4 Dialogs........................................................................................................................... 245
17.4.1 Add New Chart.......................................................................................................... 245

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 9

, Edition 02.2022
Table of Contents

17.4.2 Enter Connection Password....................................................................................... 246

17.4.3 Print Preview............................................................................................................. 246
17.4.4 Print.......................................................................................................................... 247
17.5 Toolbars..........................................................................................................................247
17.5.1 Logic Editor Toolbar...................................................................................................247
17.5.2 Toolbar Data Flow..................................................................................................... 248
17.5.3 Toolbar of the Control Flow....................................................................................... 249

Index.........................................................................................................................................................251

10 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
1 Basic Operation

1.1 Getting to Know the User Interface 12

1.2 Adjusting View of User Interface and Contents 19

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 11

, Edition 02.2022
Basic Operation
1.1 Getting to Know the User Interface

1.1 Getting to Know the User Interface

1.1.1 User Interface

Everything you need to configure and operate A8000 devices is seamlessly integrated in the user interface of
the Logic Editor. The user interface of the SICAM Device Manager Logic Editor consists of several windows.
The following figure shows an example of the components of the Logic Editor user interface:

[le_le_ui, 1, en_US]

Figure 1-1 SICAM Device Manager Logic Editor UI - Sample

The user interface of the Logic Editor is structured as follows:

No. Element Description
1 Title bar of the Logic Editor The title bar shows the name of the project. Here you also find the
default operator elements for closing the SICAM Device Manager
Logic Editor and for minimizing and maximizing the Logic Editor
user interface.
2 Menu bar The menu bar contains commands that you need frequently for
your work.
3 Toolbar The 17.5.1 Logic Editor Toolbar permits fast access to actions and
settings.
4 Title bar of the working area The title bar of the working area names the open object including
the path.
5 Project tree The 1.1.2 Project Tree is the central element when working with
the Logic Editor. The individual project-tree icons give access to all
data and tools.

12 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
 Basic Operation
1.1 Getting to Know the User Interface

No. Element Description

6 Working area The 1.1.3 Working Area displays open objects such as, for
example, editors, views, tables, or the 1.1.6 Editor Window. The
working area is blank if you have not opened any of these objects.
7 Tabs This area displays the tabs that are available for the work situation
respectively. If you click on a tab, it gets opened and its content is
displayed in the task card.
The following tabs are available:

• 17.2.2 Signals
• 17.2.4 Testing
• 17.2.3 Variables
• 17.2.5 Instructions
• 17.2.1 Libraries
Certain tabs contain the Information palette. If you highlight an
element, for example in the library, this palette shows detailed
information about this element.
8 Task card The 1.1.5 Task Card contains the contents of various tabs
depending on the content of the working area. These tabs enable
actions such as searching, or contain structured elements in libra-
ries and catalogs, for example blocks for function charts (CFC).
9 Inspector window The 1.1.4 Inspector Window shows additional information about
an element highlighted in the working area or on actions
executed. This information includes the properties of an element,
for example.
10 Object bar The 1.1.7 Object Bar contains buttons for all open editors, tables,
input and output areas. You can switch swiftly between open tools
with these buttons.

Related Topics
1.2.1 Adjusting Working Area

1.1.2 Project Tree

The SICAM Device Manager Logic Editor manages the components of a system and all the data associated with
it in relation to the project. The project tree gives you access to all data and tools. The following figure shows
the project tree.

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 13

, Edition 02.2022
Basic Operation
1.1 Getting to Know the User Interface

[sc_le_project_tree, 2, en_US]

The figure shows the symbol for a SICAM A8000 device. Further entries are subordinate to this, giving you
access to device data. Double-clicking on the symbol in the lowermost level of a branch opens an editor or a
setting sheet or executes a certain action in the working area.
Some examples will explain these mechanisms:

• The CFC_1 entry is an access point to an editor. Double-clicking this entry opens the 17.1.1 Function-
Chart (CFC) Editor. The entry name can be defined by the user.

• The Add new chart entry is an action. This lets you open a dialog enabling you to add a new CFC chart.
Among other things, you can perform the following actions with the project-tree function:

• Open the17.1.1 Function-Chart (CFC) Editor to create a CFC chart.

• Open the 17.1.1 Function-Chart (CFC) Editor to create a User-Defined Function Block (UFB).

• Open the Trend Display and Dynamic Display (6.12 Watching Values in Trend/Dynamic Display while
CFC Online Analysis (Monitoring) is in Progress) for viewing values in Online Test mode.

• Open the Force table for one ressource to force block IO inputs and outputs.

• Open the 9.4 User-Defined Structures editor for creating and modifying user-defined structures.
The following figure shows an example of the components comprising the project tree:

14 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
 Basic Operation
1.1 Getting to Know the User Interface

The project tree is structured as follows:

No. Element Description
1 Title bar The title bar of the project tree contains the button for closing
the project tree. After closing, the button positions itself on the
left-hand margin. It changes from a left-pointing arrow to a
right-pointing arrow. You can reopen the project tree by clicking
this arrow.
2 Toolbar With the icon on the right-hand margin, you can show the over-
view in the working area. As a result, the underlying objects and
actions of the elements are hidden in the project tree. Minimize
the overview to show them again.
3 Project You find all objects and actions relevant to the project in the
Project folder.
4 Offline configuration Each device added to the project has its own folder with the
project-specific name for the device. Objects and actions associ-
ated with offline configuration of the device are structured
within this folder.

Related Topics
1.1.1 User Interface
1.2.1 Adjusting Working Area
3.1.1 Overview of Projects

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 15

, Edition 02.2022
Basic Operation
1.1 Getting to Know the User Interface

1.1.3 Working Area

The editors that you open to edit elements are displayed within the working area.
You can open several tools simultaneously in the working area. The 1.1.7 Object Bar then contains one button
for each opened tool. You can switch between the individual tools with these buttons.
You can split the working area horizontally or vertically. In this way, you can display 2 tools simultaneously in
the working area. You find more information about this under 1.2.1 Adjusting Working Area.

Related Topics
1.1.1 User Interface

1.1.4 Inspector Window

Additional information about a selected element or actions executed is displayed in the Inspector window.
The following figure shows the components of the Inspector window:

[le_le_inspector_window, 1, en_US]

The Inspector window has the following structure:

No. Element Description
1 Properties tab The properties of the selected element are displayed in this tab.
Here, you can modify editable properties of the element.
2 Info tab Further information about the selected element and indications
regarding the actions executed are displayed on this tab.

Related Topics
1.1.1 User Interface
1.2.1 Adjusting Working Area

1.1.5 Task Card

Depending on the object edited or selected, tabs are available in the task card for execution of further actions.

16 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
 Basic Operation
1.1 Getting to Know the User Interface

Here are a few examples:

• Selecting signals and assigning them to an element

• Testing device in Online Test Mode

• Viewing instantiated variables

You find the tabs in a bar on the right edge of the screen. You can collapse and expand the tabs with these
tabs. More complex tabs are subdivided into palettes, which you can also collapse and expand.
The following figure shows an example of the components in the task card:

[le_le_taskcard, 3, en_US]

The task card has the following structure:

No. Element Description
1 Title bar The title bar of the tabs contains the button for closing the task
card. After closing, the button positions itself on the right-hand
margin. It changes from a right-pointing arrow to a left-pointing
arrow. You can reopen the task card by clicking this arrow.
2 Toolbar An icon bar of the tab permits fast access to actions and settings.
3 Palette Palettes subdivide complex tabs. You find the arrow for closing the
palette in its title bar. After closing, it changes from a downward-
pointing arrow to a right-pointing arrow and serves to open the
palette.

The following tabs are available depending on the relevant working situation:

• 17.2.2 Signals

• 17.2.4 Testing

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 17

, Edition 02.2022
Basic Operation
1.1 Getting to Know the User Interface

• 17.2.3 Variables

• 17.2.5 Instructions

• 17.2.1 Libraries

Related Topics
1.1.1 User Interface
1.2.1 Adjusting Working Area

1.1.6 Editor Window

The Editor window supplements the 1.1.2 Project Tree. When the Editor window is open, the content of the
folder currently selected in project tree is displayed in the 1.1.3 Working Area.
You can perform the following actions in the Editor window:

• Assigning Signals as inputs and outputs of function blocks

• Adding function blocks to the chart

• Renaming function blocks

• Assigning inputs and outputs of function blocks

The following figure shows an example of the components in the Editor window:

[le_le_editor_window, 1, en_US]

The Editor window has the following structure:

No. Element Description
1 Detailed view This view displays the details of the object selected in the project
tree. The details displayed can be modified in this view.
2 Toolbar view This view displays the tools which can be used in the detailed
view.
3 Tab view This view displays the tabs relevant to the object selected in the
project tree.

18 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
 Basic Operation
1.2 Adjusting View of User Interface and Contents

Related Topics
1.1.1 User Interface
1.2.1 Adjusting Working Area

1.1.7 Object Bar

The object bar contains one button for each tool opened in the 1.1.3 Working Area. In certain cases, the object
bar groups several buttons into one single button, for example when you have opened several display pages.
A list box expands when you click such a button. Out of this list box, you can then select the required content
and display it in the working area.
The following figure shows an example of the object bar:

Related Topics
1.1.1 User Interface
1.1.3 Working Area

1.2 Adjusting View of User Interface and Contents

1.2.1 Adjusting Working Area

You can adapt the 1.1.3 Working Area to your needs.

You can do this in one of the following ways:

• Maximizing the working area

You can minimize the 1.1.5 Task Card, the 1.1.2 Project Tree, and the 1.1.4 Inspector Window with one
click. This maximizes the working area.

• Minimizing working-area objects

You can minimize the open working area objects, for example, editors, tables, or other input and selec-
tion areas. A minimized object stays open, however. You can quickly maximize it again via the object bar.

• Splitting the working area vertically or horizontally

If you wish to view 2 objects simultaneously in the working area, you can split it vertically or horizontally.

• Separating objects from the working area

You can also completely separate objects from the working area and thus open them in a new window.
You can drag them to a 2nd monitor, for example.

• Restoring the working area

After maximizing the working area or after separating objects, you can cancel maximizing or separation
again with one click.

Maximizing the Working Area

² Open an object, for example an editor or a table.
The object is displayed in the working area.
² Click Maximize button in the title bar of the object.
The task card, the project tree, and the Inspector windows are collapsed. The working area is shown in its
maximum size.

Minimizing the Working Area

² Click the Restore button in the displayed title bar of the object.

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 19

, Edition 02.2022
Basic Operation
1.2 Adjusting View of User Interface and Contents

The task card, the project tree, and the Inspector windows are expanded.

Minimizing Objects in the Working Area

² Click the Minimize button in the title bar of the object to minimize an object in the working area.
The object is minimized. It remains available via the object bar.
- or -
² To minimize all objects at the same time, click Minimize all in the Window menu.
All objects are minimized. They remain available via the object bar.

Maximizing Working-Area Objects

² Click the associated button in the object bar.
The object is maximized and is displayed in the working area.

Splitting the Working Area Horizontally

²
Click in the 17.5.1 Logic Editor Toolbar on the button .

The object displayed in the working area before clicking, and the object that corresponds to the next button in
the object toolbar are displayed among each other.

Splitting the Working Area Vertically

²
Click in the 17.5.1 Logic Editor Toolbar on the button .

The object displayed in the working area before clicking, and the object that corresponds to the next button in
the object toolbar are displayed among each other.

Separating an Object from the Working Area

² Click the Separate button in the displayed title bar of the object.
The object is separated from the working area and is displayed in a window of its own. You can position the
window freely. If you minimize the window, you can restore it via the object bar.

Fixing an Object in the Working Area

² Click the Fix button in the separated title bar of the object.
The object is displayed in the working area again.

Related Topics
² 1.1.1 User Interface

1.2.2 Adjusting Rows and Columns

You can adjust the columns and rows of tables in different ways:

• Adjusting column width

In all tables, you can change the column width as required or you can optimize it. When you use the 2nd
method, the column width is adjusted automatically so that the widest content of the column is
displayed completely.

20 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
 Basic Operation
1.2 Adjusting View of User Interface and Contents

• Hiding and showing rows

When content is structured hierarchically, comparable to what is used for 1.1.2 Project Tree, you can
collapse and expand the rows. After a row has been collapsed, it is no longer visible. After it is expanded,
the row is displayed as it was originally shown.
The following figure shows an example of hidden rows:

[sc_le_adjusting1, 2, en_US]

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 21

, Edition 02.2022
Basic Operation
1.2 Adjusting View of User Interface and Contents

The following figure shows an example of unhidden rows:

[sc_le_adjusting2, 2, en_US]

Modifying the Column Width

² Move the mouse pointer in the header of the table to the right-hand separating line of the column whose
width you wish to change.
The mouse pointer changes to a vertical line with one left arrow and one right arrow.
² Click the separating line and, with the mouse button pressed, drag it to the left or right.
² Release the mouse button as soon as the separating line has reached the desired column width.
The column width is updated.

Optimizing the Column Width

² Move the mouse pointer in the header of the table to the right-hand separating line of the column whose
width you wish to optimize.
The mouse pointer changes to a vertical line with one left arrow and one right arrow.
² Double-click the separating line.
The column width is adjusted to the widest column content.

Showing and Hiding Rows

² To show or hide subordinate rows belonging to a row, click the tip of the arrow on the left-hand margin
of the row.

22 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
 Basic Operation
1.2 Adjusting View of User Interface and Contents

The subordinate rows are shown if the arrow tip points to the right before clicking. The subordinate rows are
hidden if the arrow tip points down before clicking.
² To show or hide all rows, right-click any point within the table.
² In the context menu, click Display all elements or Reduce elements.
If you select Display all elements, the rows belonging to all hierarchy levels are displayed. If you select
Reduce elements, now only the rows belonging to the top hierarchy levels are displayed.

Related Topics
² 1.2.3 Sorting Column Content
² 1.2.4 Filtering Column Content

1.2.3 Sorting Column Content

You can sort the content of tables and matrices. To do this, select a column as the reference. You can select an
alphabetically ascending or descending sort order for the content of this column. The order of the rest of the
column content is adjusted automatically. You cannot sort columns independently from one another.

Sorting Column Content in Ascending Order

² Click the header of an unsorted column or of one that is sorted in descending order.
The content is sorted in alphabetically ascending order.

Sorting Column Content in Descending Order

² Click the header of a column that is sorted in ascending order.
The content is sorted in alphabetically descending order.

Related Topics
² 1.2.4 Filtering Column Content
² 1.2.2 Adjusting Rows and Columns

1.2.4 Filtering Column Content

You can filter the tables of the signal and variables task card. Filtered tables show only the rows that comply
with the selected criteria. You can filter the entire data using a text based filter. This can be entered above the
respective list. It is also possible to enter Wildcards (*) in the filter box.

Canceling Filtering
² In the textbox containing the string which is applied for filtering, just remove the string in order to stop
filtering.

Related Topics
² 1.2.3 Sorting Column Content
² 1.2.2 Adjusting Rows and Columns

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 23

, Edition 02.2022
2 Assistance

2.1 Overview on the Logic Editor Information System 25

2.2 Using Logic Editor Help 25
2.3 Icons in the Info Tab 27
2.4 Copying and Deleting Messages 27

24 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
 Assistance
2.1 Overview on the Logic Editor Information System

2.1 Overview on the Logic Editor Information System

To enable you to perform individual activities swiftly and efficiently, Logic Editor offers you diverse variants of
information.
The entire Logic Editor information system is composed of several components:

• Logic Editor Help, which you currently have open before you

• Tooltips and rollouts, which help you while entering values

• Info tab, which displays messages to monitor current actions

Logic Editor Help

In the form of the Help function, Logic Editor offers you an extensive information package that describes the
functionality of all modules. Logic Editor Help also contains more in-depth reference information and practi-
cally oriented examples. To launch Logic Editor Help, select the Show help menu item in the Help menu.
Logic Editor Help opens in a window that does not cover up the working area. You can vary the size of this
window. You can display a table of contents or an index in addition to the content. To find information about
a module or an activity, you can search through the Help for a topic or a keyword. You find more information
about this under 2.2 Using Logic Editor Help.

Tooltips and Rollouts

There are tooltips for the elements belonging to the user interface of the software that explain each function
of the element. For some self-explanatory elements such as Open or Save, Logic Editor does not offer any
tooltips. To display a tooltip, position the mouse pointer on the element. This provides you, for instance, with
additional information about the contents of a table as soon as you position the mouse on the title of a
column.
In areas containing text and list boxes, for example for the initial value for an interface defined in the user-
defined function block, Logic Editor displays rollouts. A rollout informs you about the range of values and data
types that are required for input or selection.

Info Tab
The 17.3.1 Info tab displays messages with which you can monitor states, sequences, and results of actions.
An icon classifies each message in the Info tab. You find more information about this icons under 2.3 Icons in
the Info Tab.
The messages in the Info tab are divided thematically into 5 further tabs:

• 17.3.2 General

• 17.3.3 Compile

2.2 Using Logic Editor Help

Opening Help
² To launch the table of contents for the Help, select Show help in the Help menu.
- or -
² Press the <F1> key to display the help matching the current context.

Navigating with the Toolbar

²
To redisplay help topics already displayed, click the buttons in the Logic Editor help toolbar: and

- or -

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 25

, Edition 02.2022
Assistance
2.2 Using Logic Editor Help

²
To get to the Help homepage, click the button in the Logic Editor toolbar: .

Full Text Search

² Open the Search tab.
² Enter the search term in the text box.
² Narrow your search by additional criteria. Information about this can be found in section Additional
Criteria for the Search
² Optionally, you can use logical operations. To do this, click the arrow key on the right of the search box.
Information about this can be found in section Advanced Search.
² Click List Topics.
The search starts. The results are then listed with their title, location, and rank. The Location column contains
the section in which you will find the help topic you are looking for.

Additional Search Criteria

² Select Search previous results to start a new search run, but within your last search results only.
² Select Match similar words to also find words that deviate only slightly from your search term.
² To obtain only results that contain your search term in the title, select Search titles only. The content of
the Help topics is then ignored during the search.

Advanced Search
² Combine 2 or more search terms with the AND operator to find only Help topics that contain all words in
the text that you are looking for.
² Combine 2 or more search terms with the OR operator to find only Help topics that contain one of the
words in the text that you are looking for.
² Combine 2 or more search terms with the NEAR operator to find only Help topics in which the search
terms are directly related (8 words).
² To exclude Help topics that contain a certain word from the search, place the NOT operator before the
word.

Printing Information
² Click the Print button.
The table of contents opens in a window of its own.
² In Print help topics dialog, mark the folders and help topics you want to print with a checkmark.
² Click the Print button.
The marked information is printed.

Related Topics
² 2.1 Overview on the Logic Editor Information System

26 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
 Assistance
2.3 Icons in the Info Tab

2.3 Icons in the Info Tab

An icon classifies each entry in the 17.3.1 Info tab. Logic Editor uses the following icons.

• Icon
This icon indicates the message pertaining to a total action that is completed normally. An example of
such a message is Project Manhatten South opened. The icon is used in the 17.3.2 General tab and in
the 17.3.3 Compile tab.

• Icon
This icon indicates the message to a partial action. The partial action can occur successfully. An example
is Memory size for variables: 16 byte (maximum size: 4096 byte). The icon is used in the General and
Compile tabs.

• Icon
This icon indicates the message to a critical procedure or state. An example of such a message is The
signal ‘Signal 1.VALUE’ is not available (anymore). The icon is used in the General and Compile tabs.

• Icon
This icon shows warnings, e.g. The data types of the input 'ctd_1_CD' and the connected signal
'AI_CI102.VALUE' are not fully compatible. The icon is used in the 17.3.2 General tab and in the
17.3.3 Compile tab.

Related Topics
2.1 Overview on the Logic Editor Information System

2.4 Copying and Deleting Messages

You can copy messages in the 17.3.2 General and 17.3.3 Compile tabs and insert these messages, for
example, in a text document. You can copy individually marked messages or all messages of a tab at the same
time.
You can manually delete the messages in the General and Compile tabs. You can only delete all messages of
a tab at the same time. You cannot manually delete messages pertaining to inconsistencies. When you elimi-
nate an inconsistency, the associated message is also deleted.

Copying Individual Messages in a Tab

² In the tab concerned, select one or more messages.
² Right-click on one of the messages.
² In the context menu click Copy.
The selected messages are copied to the clipboard.

Copying All Messages in a Tab

² In the tab concerned, right-click on a message.
² In the context menu, click Copy all.
All messages in the tab are copied to the clipboard.

Deleting All Messages in a Tab

² In the tab concerned, right-click on a message.
² In the context menu, click Clear all.
All messages in the tab are deleted.

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 27

, Edition 02.2022
Assistance
2.4 Copying and Deleting Messages

Related Topics
² 2.1 Overview on the Logic Editor Information System

28 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
3 Projects

3.1 Managing Projects 30

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 29

, Edition 02.2022
Projects
3.1 Managing Projects

3.1 Managing Projects

3.1.1 Overview of Projects

Logic Editor manages all data related to CFC charts for a certain device of the A8000 family in a project. The
project is created automatically when opening the Logic Editor from the SICAM Device Manager. If you have
opened a project, the project will be displayed in a hierarchical structure in the 1.1.2 Project Tree. The symbols
and text boxes in the project tree provide you with access to all of the project data and the actions associated
with it.

Related Topics
3.1.2 Opening a Project
3.1.3 Saving a Project
3.1.5 Deleting a Project
3.1.6 Printing Project Data

3.1.2 Opening a Project

NOTE

i You cannot open a project directly using the Logic Editor. The project can be opened using the SICAM
Device Manager which will start the Logic Editor automatically. For further assistance refer to the SICAM
Device Manager help.

3.1.3 Saving a Project

If changes have been made in the Logic Editor, these can be saved and transmitted to the SICAM Device
Manager.

Saving a Project
² In the Project menu, click Save.
- or -
²
In the 17.5.1 Logic Editor Toolbar, click the button.

All changes in the project are saved under the current project name.

NOTE

i If Logic Editor loses connection to the SICAM Device Manager, it is recommended to save the changes done
in SICAM Device Manager, close the application, restart the application, and save changes again in order
to synchronize the changes with the SICAM Device Manager.

Related Topics
² 3.1.1 Overview of Projects

3.1.4 Closing a Project

You can close a project during any phase of the project planning.

30 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
 Projects
3.1 Managing Projects

Closing a Project
² In the Project menu, click Exit.
If you have changed the project since last saving it, a confirmation prompt appears. Select one of the
following options:
² If you save changes in the current project and wish to close the project, click Yes.
- or -
² If you wish to close the project without saving the last changes in the project, click No.
- or -
² If you wish to cancel closing the project, click Cancel. In this case the project remains open.

Related Topics
² 3.1.1 Overview of Projects

3.1.5 Deleting a Project

NOTE

i Deleting a project is handled within the SICAM Device Manager software. For further assistance refer to
the SICAM Device Manager help.

Related Topics
3.1.1 Overview of Projects

3.1.6 Printing Project Data

You can print out all project data or data from individual categories.
Before starting the printing process, you can create and adapt print templates with the Documentation func-
tion. You can prepare project data as a standardized circuit manual and give it a uniform layout.

Starting the Printing

² Open the 1.1.2 Project Tree.
² Select the project name in the project tree.
² In the Project menu, click Print.
The 17.4.4 Print dialog opens.
² Determine the scope of printing with this dialog. You will find more information on this under
11.4.2 Determining the Scope of Printing.
² Use this dialog to select a printer, the document layout, and the properties. You will find more informa-
tion on this under 11.4.3 Selecting Print Options.
² Click Print.
The Select print options dialog closes and the selected data is printed.

Related Topics
² 3.1.1 Overview of Projects

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 31

, Edition 02.2022
4 Signals and Settings

4.1 Overview of Signals 33

4.2 Working with the Signal Catalog 33

32 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
 Signals and Settings
4.1 Overview of Signals

4.1 Overview of Signals

Signals are information, in general process information, which (from the application program's point of view)
comes from outside and are read by the application program, or are output from the application program and
go outwards.
For devices of the A8000 family, objects known from the IEC 60870-5-101/104 standard are vizualised as
signals and are divided into the following categories:

• Spontaneous

• Periodical

• System
Every signal contains several signal elements as child nodes based on the signal type (e.g. TI37).

Signal Name
The original name identifies the original signal. An example for this is AI_MVfloat100. You cannot change the
original name. The system can always identify the original signal, even if the signal name has been changed in
the SICAM Device Manager.

Related Topics
4.2.1 Overview of the Signal Catalog
4.2.2 Open the Signal Catalog and Adjust View

4.2 Working with the Signal Catalog

4.2.1 Overview of the Signal Catalog

Signals are information, in general process information, which (from the application's point of view) come
from outside and are read by the application or are output from the application and go outwards.
The signal catalog can be modified in the SICAM Device Manager.
You can add signals from the signal catalog in the display page or the function chart with drag and drop.

Related Topics
4.1 Overview of Signals
4.2.2 Open the Signal Catalog and Adjust View
5.5.3 Interconnecting a Block with a Signal

4.2.2 Open the Signal Catalog and Adjust View

The signal catalog is part of the 17.2.2 Signals tab. This tab is available if

• the CFC editor is opened.

You will find more information about this under 5.2.2 Opening a CFC.
The following standard functions are available to adapt the view of the signal catalog:

• 1.2.4 Filtering Column Content

• 1.2.3 Sorting Column Content

• 1.2.2 Adjusting Rows and Columns

You can also show and hide the Information palette.

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 33

, Edition 02.2022
Signals and Settings
4.2 Working with the Signal Catalog

Opening the Signal Catalog

² Open one of the listed project components in the working area.
The Signals tab is displayed if the task card is already opened.
² If the task card is closed, at the border of the task area, click on Signals.
The task card is opened and the Signals tab is displayed.

Related Topics
² 4.2.1 Overview of the Signal Catalog

4.2.3 Selecting a Signal Element in the Signal Catalog

In order to use a signal in a display page or a function chart, you must select the signal from the signal catalog
in the 17.2.2 Signals tab. Use drag and drop to add signals from the signal catalog to the display page or the
function chart. You can find information about this in the following topics: 5.5.3 Interconnecting a Block with
a Signal

Signal Element
A signal element is a sub-structure element of a signal:

[le_le_signal_element, 1, en_US]

(1) Signal
(2) Signal Element

Selecting a Signal Element

✧ In the task card, open the 17.2.2 Signals tab. You find more information about this under 4.2.2 Open
the Signal Catalog and Adjust View.

The signals of the respective device to which a display page or a function chart is associated are displayed in
the signal catalog, embedded in the signal list.
✧ If necessary, use the Filter Textbox at the top of the signal list to apply a filter on the signal list. You find
more information about this under 1.2.4 Filtering Column Content.

✧ Open further levels in the signal list until you are able to select the desired signal element.
✧ Highlight the required signal element.

You can now drag the highlighted signal element to the display page of the function chart.

34 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
 Signals and Settings
4.2 Working with the Signal Catalog

[sc_signallist_usedbytypes, 1, en_US]

It is also possible to drag and drop a complete signal instead of only a signal element. In this case, the Logic
Editor automatically selects and connects a signal element (preferably the Value signal element, if available).

Symbol Representation
For each signal element, the signal catalog shows a symbol to indicate whether the signal element is used as
an input or output in any plan (chart or user-defined function block) and a number how often it is used as
input or output (columns In and Out).
The same applies to a signal. In this case, the columns In and Out display the accumulated number of signal
elements used as input or output.
Symbol Description
The element is not used in any plan.

The element is used as an input in any plan.

The element is used as an output in any plan.

The element is used as an input and output in any plan.

Jump to Used Signal Element

As soon as a signal element has been connected, you can use the context menu to jump to the locations
where this signal element is connected.
✧ Right-click the desired signal element.
✧ Select Used by... from the context menu.
✧ Select the target location from the list.

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 35

, Edition 02.2022
Signals and Settings
4.2 Working with the Signal Catalog

[sc_signallist_usedby, 1, en_US]

At the target location, the corresponding input/output is highlighted:

[sc_usedby_result, 1, en_US]

Related Topics
4.2.1 Overview of the Signal Catalog

36 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
5 Configuring Function Charts (CFC)

5.1 Brief Introduction to Function Charts (CFC) 38

5.2 Managing Function Charts 44
5.3 Adjusting Function Chart and Chart View 53
5.4 Adding and Processing Elements in the Function Chart 59
5.5 Interconnection of Blocks in the Data Flow View 65
5.6 Forcing of a Block IO 76
5.7 User Interface 77
5.8 Checking and Finishing Function Chart 79
5.9 CFC-Plan Access Protection 80

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 37

, Edition 02.2022
Configuring Function Charts (CFC)
5.1 Brief Introduction to Function Charts (CFC)

5.1 Brief Introduction to Function Charts (CFC)

5.1.1 Meaning of CFC

CFC stands for Continuous Function Chart. With a CFC, the automation engineer can implement the control
functionality.
With the 17.1.1 Function-Chart (CFC) Editor, you can create function charts (CFC). For this, you use a library
with preassembled blocks that you interconnect for the overall function. This eliminates the programming of
blocks and reduces the frequency of errors.
In order to create the connection to the process or also to other CFC functions, you can use either so-called
connectors or sidebars. Through these 2 elements, you can interconnect blocks with signals or settings from
the signal catalog. On the one hand, signals and settings serve as input information for the CFC function. On
the other hand, signals act as output indications that are created as the result of a CFC function.
When you have completely configured the function charts, the Logic Editor creates an executable program for
an A8000 series device.

Related Topics
5.1.3 Function Chart
5.1.4 Block
5.1.7 Naming Conventions
5.1.6 Flow Model
5.1.5 Configuration Strategy

5.1.2 Extended Processing

If the device supports Extended Processing, you can see an entry for each Extended Processing in the tree.
The name of an Extended Processing is defined by the device and cannot be changed by the user. For each
Extended Processing, the entries for charts, trend view, UFBs, and user-specific structures are available.

[sc_cfc multiple resources, 1, en_US]

The names of charts, UFBs, structures, and trend views must be unique within an Extended Processing. All
objects of an Extended Processing are only valid and usable within this Extended Processing.
Signals can be used in several Extended Processings.

38 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
 Configuring Function Charts (CFC)
5.1 Brief Introduction to Function Charts (CFC)

Depending on the level which is selected in the tree, you can compile a single Extended Processing or all
Extended Processings.

The appropriate icon in the tree indicates if the Extended Processing has to be compiled.
If you are online with an Extended Processing, this is also indicated by an icon in the tree. All editors of other
Extended Processings are automatically closed. Only the current chart stays open.

Related Topics
5.1.3 Function Chart
5.1.4 Block
5.1.7 Naming Conventions
5.1.6 Flow Model
5.1.5 Configuration Strategy

5.1.3 Function Chart

You can always create CFC functions within a Continuous Function Chart. Such a CFC can consist of a number
of sheets. The sheet size is also variable.
Refer also to 8.1 Brief Introduction to User-Defined Function Blocks.
A Continuous Function Chart (CFC) always belongs to one particular device. The CFCs of a device are hence
saved within the project structure in the device folder. Here, you find the Charts folder. All function charts are
saved in this folder.

Related Topics
5.1.1 Meaning of CFC
5.1.7 Naming Conventions
5.1.5 Configuration Strategy
5.2.6 Switching between Control Flow and Data Flow

5.1.4 Block

For the configuration of a Continuous Function Chart, you use predefined function blocks. You can use various
block types for this purpose.

Block Type
A block type is a type-coded block that can be used multiple times. A block receives all the required data to
complete its task from the block inputs. The block algorithm processes the input values and displays the
returned results as the output.
Each block type has a type definition, which contains the following:

• Type name
The type name describes the function of the block. For example, ADD is used for adding values.

• Algorithm
The algorithm is a sequence of instructions for processing a task, for example, adding multiple values.

• Inputs and outputs

Input and output communicate with the process through the assigned values.

Block Instance
A block instance is the use of a block type in the Continuous Function Chart. You can create multiple blocks
from a single block type in consideration of the resource consumption. Each block instance receives a unique

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 39

, Edition 02.2022
Configuring Function Charts (CFC)
5.1 Brief Introduction to Function Charts (CFC)

name within a CFC. The block instance inherits the default settings of the block type as a standard, for
example, the initial values of the inputs.
During configuration, you can enter individual initial values, change the name of the block instance, and inter-
connect the block instances.

Displaying the Block

A block consists of the block header and the block interface. The size of the block is determined based on the
number of block interfaces. You can show and hide these. A symbol on the lower edge of the block shows that
connections are hidden. The width of the block can be adjusted continuously.
The block header can contain the following content:

• Name of the block instance or name of the block type

You can toggle the display with the corresponding icon:

[sc_le_block_toggle, 1, --_--]

• Comments about the block instance

• Block position within the task sequence

The block interface contains the connections of the block:

• Left: block inputs

• Right: block outputs

The block inputs have the parameter values of the block type by default. Each block connection has a name
and a data type. The name of the block connection is displayed either in its full length or shortened depending
on the block width. The following figure displays an OR block with a status as an example.
Example with block showing the instance name:

Example with block showing the type name:

Related Topics
5.1.1 Meaning of CFC
5.1.7 Naming Conventions
5.1.6 Flow Model

5.1.5 Configuration Strategy

You can configure charts graphically via the drag and drop feature.

40 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
 Configuring Function Charts (CFC)
5.1 Brief Introduction to Function Charts (CFC)

Configuring CFCs Graphically

With graphical configuring, you can add the blocks from the block library into the Continuous Function Chart.
You can interconnect the block connections via drag and drop. You can document the CFC with additional text
boxes. In order to configure the CFC graphically, use the 17.1.2 Data Flow view.
The graphical configuration offers the following advantages compared to the textual configuration:

• Simple wiring of connections with drag and drop

• Graphical display of the signal profile

Optimizing Performance

NOTE

i In order to keep the function charts (CFC) clearly represented, Siemens recommends using user-defined
function blocks (UFBs) to structure the tasks if possible. Structuring tasks of the function chart by using
user-defined function blocks has the following benefits:

• It helps you to clearly separate the tasks of the process.

• You have the advantage of reusing the UFBs easily in other plans.

• Configuration effort is decreased.

If more than 1 function chart is allowed for the used device type, structuring can also be done using further
function charts.

Related Topics
5.1.1 Meaning of CFC
5.1.3 Function Chart

5.1.6 Flow Model

The execution model describes when and in which order the configured blocks in the Continuous Function
Charts are executed.
2 factors characterize the execution model:

• The task level of the CFC function

• The task sequence of the block within a function

Task Level of the CFC Function

On the A8000 device, a CFC and its configured CFC functions run on 1 of 3 task levels. A CFC is always
executed cyclically.
For CMIC/802x Extended Processings, 1 CFC can only be assigned to 1 task level. For 805x Extended Process-
ings, several task levels can be assigned at a time.
You can choose from the following task levels:

• High

• Normal

• Low

Task
The target system is providing one Task. The cycle time is configurable via Chart sequence & extras > Task
assignment, then a right-click on the desired Task to open its Properties.
The resource consumption of the created CFC chart can be viewed in the Testing task card (refer to 17.2 Tabs
in the Task Area).

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 41

, Edition 02.2022
Configuring Function Charts (CFC)
5.1 Brief Introduction to Function Charts (CFC)

[sc_le_flowmodel_task, 2, en_US]

Figure 5-1 Resource Consumption – CMIC/802x

42 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
 Configuring Function Charts (CFC)
5.1 Brief Introduction to Function Charts (CFC)

[sc_le_flowmodel_task_805x, 2, en_US]

Figure 5-2 Resource Consumption – 805x

NOTE

i Empty function charts and unused subcharts consume resources and they also contribute to the system
resource consumption. Siemens recommends deleting empty function charts and unused subcharts.

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 43

, Edition 02.2022
Configuring Function Charts (CFC)
5.2 Managing Function Charts

Task Sequence of the Blocks within a Function

The task sequence determines in which order the device processes the individual blocks within a function. The
following rule applies for this: A 1st block, whose output is connected with the input of a 2nd block, must be
processed before this 2nd block.
The task sequence initially results from the sequence of the insertion of the individual blocks. You can recog-
nize the sequence of the execution on the so-called sequence number in the blue field of a block. You can
change the task sequence in the Control flow view. Moreover, you can have the task sequence of the block

automatically optimized by clicking the icon in the toolbar.

Related Topics
5.1.1 Meaning of CFC
5.1.3 Function Chart
5.1.4 Block

5.1.7 Naming Conventions

Allowed Characters
The following characters are allowed:

• 0-9

• a-z

• A-Z

• _ (underscore)

Forbidden Characters
The following characters are not allowed:

• Special characters, for example !"§$%&/()=

• Umlauts

• Comma

Related Topics
5.1.1 Meaning of CFC
5.1.3 Function Chart
5.1.4 Block

5.2 Managing Function Charts

5.2.1 Adding a CFC

You can add function chart to each Extended Processing of a device depending on its type (e.g. CMIC only
supports 1 CFC plan). A new function-block diagram does not yet contain any blocks or interconnections. To
add a new function chart, use the 1.1.2 Project Tree.

Adding a New CFC via the Project Tree

² In the project tree, open the Charts folder of the Extended Processing to which you want to add a Contin-
uous Function Chart.
² Double-click Add new chart in this folder.

44 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
 Configuring Function Charts (CFC)
5.2 Managing Function Charts

The 17.4.1 Add New Chart dialog opens.

² The text box Name contains a continually numbered standard name for the Continuous Function Chart.
You can optionally enter a different name for the CFC.
² The list box Task assignment is used to select the task level. There is only 1 task level for CMIC/CP802x,
whereas for CP805x there are 3 task levels.
² In order to enter additional information that needs to be stored with the CFC, click Additional informa-
tion.
The dialog is expanded vertically by the additional text boxes.
² In these text boxes, you can optionally enter a comment, version number, function family, and your
name.
² Optionally mark the check box Add and open. In this case, the CFC opens in the working area directly
after it is added.
² Click OK.
The new CFC is created. The CFC name is added within the CFCs folder.

Related Topics
² 5.1.3 Function Chart
² 5.2.2 Opening a CFC
² 5.2.3 Renaming a Function Chart (CFC)
² 5.2.4 Copying a CFC
² 5.2.5 Deleting CFCs

5.2.2 Opening a CFC

CFCs are related to the device. That is why a function chart within the project structure is always filed in a
device folder. To open a function chart, use the 1.1.2 Project Tree.

Opening a CFC via the Project Tree

² In the project tree, open the folder of the Extended Processing for which you want to open a Continuous
Function Chart.
² Double-click Charts in this folder.
You will see the names of all available function charts (CFC).
² Double-click the name of the CFC that you want to open.
The CFC is displayed in the working area.

Related Topics
² 5.1.3 Function Chart
² 5.3.2 Scaling the View
² 5.3.1 Adjusting the Layout in the CFC Data Flow View
² 5.3.4 Adjusting Sheet Bars
² 5.3.5 Showing and Hiding the Grid
² 5.2.6 Switching between Control Flow and Data Flow

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 45

, Edition 02.2022
Configuring Function Charts (CFC)
5.2 Managing Function Charts

5.2.3 Renaming a Function Chart (CFC)

If you add a function chart (CFC), it is automatically given a consecutively numbered (ascending) default
name. You can change this name. The names of function charts (CFC) must be unique within an Extended
Processing.
You can change the name of a CFC in its properties or in the project tree.

Changing the Name in the Project Tree

² Right-click the name that you wish to change.
² Click Rename in the context menu.
The name is displayed in a text box and is marked in color.
² Enter a new name.
² Click outside of the text box.
- or -
² Press <Enter>.
You confirm your entry with these 2 actions.
The entered name is accepted.

Changing the Name in the Properties

² Show the CFC whose name you wish to change in the working area.
² Open the Inspector window.
² Select the Properties tab.
² Select the group 13.1 Function Chart – General.
² Enter a name for the CFC in the Name text box.
² Click outside of the text box.
- or -
² Press <Enter>.
You confirm your entry with these 2 actions.
The name you enter will be applied and also updated in the 1.1.2 Project Tree.

Related Topics
² 5.1.3 Function Chart
² 5.2.1 Adding a CFC

5.2.4 Copying a CFC

You have the following possibilities of copying Continuous Function Charts:

• You can copy the function charts within an Extended Processing.

• You can copy the function charts between Extended Processings.

Function charts are always copied using the 1.1.2 Project Tree.

Selecting Function Charts

² In the project tree, open the Charts folder in the offline configuration from which you want to copy the
function charts.
You see the names of all available function charts (CFC).

46 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
 Configuring Function Charts (CFC)
5.2 Managing Function Charts

² In order to copy an individual CFC, mark the name of this CFC.

- or -
² In order to copy several CFCs, mark the names of these CFCs. This is done by holding down either the
SHIFT key or the <CTRL> key, depending on the selection method.

Copying Function Charts within an Extended Processing

² In the project tree, right-click a marked function chart (CFC).
² Click Copy in the context menu.
The CFCs are copied to the clipboard.
² Right-click the Charts folder.
² Click Paste from the context menu.
Copies of the original function charts (CFC) are added in the Charts folder. The added CFCs get new names
automatically in order to preserve the uniqueness of the names.

NOTE

i If you use the Cut option from the context menu to move the CFCs, the CFC is deleted from the source
destination before being pasted to the target destination. For a protected function chart, you can use the
Copy/Paste option, but it is not possible to use the Cut option.

Copying Function Charts between 2 open Logic Editors

² In the project tree, right-click a marked function chart (CFC).
² Click Copy in the context menu.
The CFCs are copied to the clipboard.
² In the project tree, open the Charts folder in the offline configuration into which you want to copy the
CFCs.
² Right-click the folder and click Paste from the context menu.
- or -
² Keep the <CTRL> key pressed and drag the marked function charts (CFC) to the Charts folder of the
offline configuration into which you want to insert the function charts.
² Release the mouse button and the <CTRL> key.
Copies of the original function charts (CFC) are added to the Charts folder. If a function chart with same name
already exists, a dialog opens. You can select between automatically renaming the copied function charts or
replacing the existing charts in order to preserve the uniqueness of the names.

NOTE

i Instead of the Copy command, you can also use the Cut command. The function charts (CFC) are then
deleted from the source device.

Related Topics
² 5.1.3 Function Chart

5.2.5 Deleting CFCs

You can delete one or more function charts (CFC) that have been selected. Always delete function charts using
1.1.2 Project Tree.

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 47

, Edition 02.2022
Configuring Function Charts (CFC)
5.2 Managing Function Charts

NOTE

i If you delete a CFC, the cross-chart interconnections will also be deleted. In this case, the block connections
concerned receive standard values predefined by the block type.

Selecting CFCs
² In the project tree, open the Charts folder in the offline configuration from which you want to delete
function charts.
You see the names of all available function charts (CFC).
² In order to delete an individual CFC, mark the name of this CFC.
- or -
² In order to delete a number of CFCs, mark the names of these CFCs. This is done by holding down either
the SHIFT key or the <CTRL> key, depending on the selection method.

Deleting CFCs
² In the project tree, right-click a marked function chart (CFC).
² Click Delete in the context menu.
A confirmation prompt is displayed.
² Click Yes.
This confirms your action.
The marked function charts (CFC) are deleted from the project.

Related Topics
² 5.1.3 Function Chart
² 5.2.1 Adding a CFC

5.2.6 Switching between Control Flow and Data Flow

With the 17.1.1 Function-Chart (CFC) Editor, you can configure the functions in the form of Continuous Func-
tion Charts (CFC). The Function-Chart Editor also contains the 2 views 17.1.2 Data Flow and 17.1.3 Control
Flow. In order to change between these views, you have the following possibilities.

Changing from the Data Flow to the Control Flow

² Click the Control flow tab.
The Control flow view is displayed in the working area.
- or -
² Mark a block or a single connection with the right mouse button.
² Click Go to control flow in the context menu.
The Control flow view is displayed in the working area. A colored frame highlights the data of the
marked block or connection.

Changing from the Control Flow to the Data Flow

² Click the Data flow tab.
The Data flow view is displayed in the working area.
- or -
² Mark the name of a block or a single connection with the right mouse button.

48 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
 Configuring Function Charts (CFC)
5.2 Managing Function Charts

² Click Go to data flow in the context menu.

The Data flow view is displayed in the working area. A colored frame highlights the data of the marked
block or connection.

Related Topics
² 5.1.3 Function Chart

5.2.7 Printing a CFC

You can print a single function chart, a selected number of function charts, or all function charts of an
Extended Processing – or all charts of the device by printing the complete project. You cannot select several
charts of different Extended Processings, multiple selection is only possible within an Extended Processing.

NOTE

i To utilize the print space efficiently and to avoid printing any blank pages, you can adjust the layout
settings in the Sheet Bars/Layout group before printing. You can find these settings under the Properties
tab of the Inspector window of the function chart. For additional information regarding this topic, refer to
5.3.1 Adjusting the Layout in the CFC Data Flow View .

Selecting CFCs
² Open the 1.1.2 Project Tree.
- or -
² In the project, open the offline configuration for which you want to print the display pages.
² In this offline configuration, double-click Diagrams.
You see the names of all function charts (CFC) available.
² In order to print an individual CFC, mark the name of this CFC.
- or -
² In order to print a number of CFCs, mark the names of these CFCs. To do so, hold down either the
<SHIFT> key or the <CTRL> key, depending on the selection method.
- or -
² In order to print all CFCs, mark the CFCs folder.

Starting the Printing Process by Selecting the Print Options

² Select the function charts to be printed.
² Click Print in the Project menu.
The 17.4.4 Print dialog opens.
² Use this dialog to select a printer, a document layout, and the properties. You find more information
about this under 11.4.3 Selecting Print Options.
² Click Print.
The Print dialog closes and the selected data is printed.

Starting the Printing Process without Selecting the Print Options

² Select the function charts to be printed.
²
Click the icon in the 17.5.1 Logic Editor Toolbar.

Printing starts using the settings last selected.

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 49

, Edition 02.2022
Configuring Function Charts (CFC)
5.2 Managing Function Charts

Related Topics
² 5.1.3 Function Chart

5.2.8 Creating CFCs Automatically (ACG)

You can import a CSV file. The information in this CSV file is used to create CFCs automatically and to connect
signals (spontaneous/periodic), system signals, and constants with CFC blocks (standard and UFBs).

Starting the Creation Process

✧ Open the 1.1.2 Project Tree.

✧ Right-click the desired device and select Create charts automatically... from the context menu.

[sc_cfc_auto_menu, 1, en_US]

Format of the CSV File

You can export the signal management from the Device Manager as CSV file.
This CSV file can then be extended. Keep the columns A to I unchanged. Add the following headings to the
columns J to X in the given order:

Table 5-1 Headings to be added for columns J to X

Column Heading Comment

J Element
K System Signal
L Constant
M Resource
N Folder
O Chart
P Task
Q Block
R Instance

50 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
 Configuring Function Charts (CFC)
5.2 Managing Function Charts

Column Heading Comment

S Block-IO
T Block-Location x-y coordinates of the block
U Chart-Layout V03.70 and higher provides Chart-Layout and a new, more flexible
Layout.
V SheetSize Size of the pages
W Margin Margin options: On/Off, single-spaced/double-spaced
X Comment Lines containing IGNORE (or ignore) are ignored during import

CSV file with additional columns and headings

[sc_cfc_automatic, 1, en_US]

Figure 5-3 Extended CSV File from Device Manager

Examples
The following examples are taken from the rows in Figure 5-3.

Example – Complete Signal Structure, Row 2

Element, System Signal, and Constant are empty.
The Signal SIGNAL.TEST.01 will be connected in Resource M, in Folder System, in Chart SYS_BOOL, with Task
1, to input (Block-IO) in_TI of Instance BOOL_1 of Block uSysBOOL.

Example – Element, Row 3

Element filled, System Signal and Constant are empty.
The Element VALUE of Signal SIGNAL.TEST.02 will be connected in Resource M, in Folder System, in Chart
SYS_BOOL, with Task 1, to input (Block-IO) in_1 of Instance BOOL_1 of Block uSysBOOL.

Example – System Signal, Row 5

Element empty, System Signal filled, Constant empty.
The System Signal System Start will be connected in Resource M, in Folder System, in Chart SYS_BOOL, with
Task 1, to input (Block-IO) in_3 of Instance BOOL_1 of Block uSysBOOL.

Example – Constant, Row 6

Element and System Signal empty, Constant filled.

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 51

, Edition 02.2022
Configuring Function Charts (CFC)
5.2 Managing Function Charts

The Constant 1 will be connected in Resource M, in Folder System, in Chart SYS_BOOL, with Task 1, to input
(Block-IO) in_4 of Instance BOOL_1 of Block uSysBOOL.

For further columns, see Table 5-1.

NOTE

i Error handling
If the import fails, the Inspector window refers to a log file with the same format (CSV) containing details
regarding the error in column Result.

Column U: Chart-Layout vs. Layout

V03.70 and higher provides a new, more flexible Layout command in column U.
Using Layout, you can additionally delete plans (charts) as well as drag connections between individual
blocks. For this reason, the structure of the import file has been adjusted partially.
The import function automatically realizes the format by reading the entry in column U:

• If column U is named Chart-Layout, i.e. the old format, the functionality is as before.
However, you can still use Chart-Layout, old CSV files can still be read.
And you still can write files with Chart-Layout (but then without using the new functionality).

• If column U is named Layout, i.e. the new format, the additonal functionality is provided.
The following entries are possible in column Layout:

Entry Description
An empty field means that the default settings are used:
Partition ID = 1
Chart-Layout = 3×2
<digit> A number between 1 and 6 providing the maximum partition ID:
The chart is created with the number of partitions given. For each partition, the default
chart layout is used (3×2).
4×1 Only the chart layout is defined (here: 4×1)
5,3×2 The number before the comma (here: 5) is the partition ID; valid values are 1 to 6.
The term behind the comma (here: 3×2) defines the chart layout; valid values are 1 to
6, where the product of the 2 values must be ≤ 6.

Mixing old and new format is not allowed: as soon as the column name is Layout, the new format is expected.
If non-uniform layouts are used, the layout of the first line is used in each case; the layout of all further lines
for a chart is ignored (as before), only the partition ID is taken into account and additional partitions are
created if necessary.
If Partition ID = 6 is entered, then all partitions are created, i.e. also partitions 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 (where partition 1
is always present by default after a chart is created), even if it is not explicitly specified in the import file.

Example – Partition ID = 4
The partitions 1 to 4 are created, i.e. the "target partition" and all previous partitions. Partition 1 is generated
by default.

Deleting Charts
If a chart is entered with the prefix "~", it gets automatically deleted. To keep the overview, this is reasonably
done at the beginning of the file.

52 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
 Configuring Function Charts (CFC)
5.3 Adjusting Function Chart and Chart View

Connections between 2 Blocks

You can use a second file named <filename>_con.csv to draw connections between 2 blocks. This is possible
for all signal types (e.g. BOOL, REAL, Structures).
The connections can be drawn on the same chart as well as across charts.

Table 5-2 Structure of the CON file

Column Heading Comment

A Resource
B S-Chart Source chart
C S-Instance Source instance
D S-Block-IO Source block-IO
E T-Chart Target chart
F T-Instance Target instance
G T-Block-IO Target block-IO
H Comment Lines containing IGNORE (or ignore) are ignored during import

CON file with information for block connections

[sc_con-file, 1, en_US]

5.3 Adjusting Function Chart and Chart View

5.3.1 Adjusting the Layout in the CFC Data Flow View

Adjusting the Sheet Count Automatically

² If the number of available sheets in your function chart is not adequate for all required blocks or intercon-
nections, you can easily select a block in the CFC and move the block beyond the sheet border. The sheet
count is automatically increased up to max. 20 in horizontal and also in vertical direction.

Adjusting the Sheet Count Manually

² You can change the values for the sheet count and sheet size in the properties of the Inspector window
of the function chart.

NOTE

i If you reduce the sheet size or the sheet count again, all objects from non-available areas are automatically
positioned on the remaining area. If the area is not adequate for all objects, the objects are placed in the
upper left of the CFC. In this case, expand the sheet count and manually place the objects.

Displaying Properties If the CFC Is Opened

² Click in an open area in the function chart.
² Open the Inspector window.
² Select the Properties tab.
² Select the group 13.3 Sheet Bars/Layout.

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 53

, Edition 02.2022
Configuring Function Charts (CFC)
5.3 Adjusting Function Chart and Chart View

Changing Sheet Size and Sheet Count in Properties

² In the Layout area, set the desired values for the vertical and horizontal sheet count. You can select
between values from 1 to 20.
The sheet count is changed.
² Select the desired sheet size from the Sheet size list box.
All available sheets are adjusted to the new size.

Showing/Hiding Lines for the Sheet Borders

²
Click the button in the 17.5.2 Toolbar Data Flow.

Depending on the current state, border lines will be shown or hidden.

Related Topics
² 5.1.3 Function Chart
² 5.3.2 Scaling the View

5.3.2 Scaling the View

You can change the display size of the Continuous Function Chart and thus adjust it to the respective situa-
tion.
You have the following possibilities for scaling the view:

• You can scale the CFC in predefined stages.

• You can scale the CFC by percentage.

• You can adjust the CFC to fit the size of the working area.

• You can enlarge a rectangular section of the CFC.

Additionally, with the help of a tree, you can quickly navigate to certain areas within the CFC.

Scaling a CFC in Predefined Stages

² Click the arrow button in the 17.5.2 Toolbar Data Flow.
A submenu with 4 more buttons is displayed.
²
Click one of the 2 buttons or in this submenu.

NOTE

i If the maximum or minimum display size is reached, the respective button is inactive.

The CFC is displayed in a larger or smaller manner.

Scaling the CFC by Percentage

² In the Data flow view in the toolbar, open the list box .

² Select a percentage value.

- or -
² Enter a whole number percentage value between 20 and 200 in the entry field of the list box.
² Click outside the text box.
- or -

54 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
 Configuring Function Charts (CFC)
5.3 Adjusting Function Chart and Chart View

² Press the <Enter> button.

You confirm your entry with these 2 actions.
The CFC is displayed in the percentage size selected or entered.

Adjusting the CFC to Fit the Size of the Working Area

² Click the arrow button in the Data flow view toolbar.
A submenu with 4 more buttons is displayed.
²
Click the button in this submenu.

The CFC is adjusted to fit the size of the working area.

Enlarging a Rectangular Section of the CFC

² Click the arrow button in the Data flow view toolbar.
A submenu with 4 more buttons is displayed.
²
Click the button in this submenu.

This activates the selection tool.

² Left-click in an open area of the CFC and hold the mouse button to drag a rectangle.
² Release the mouse button as soon as the rectangle reaches the desired size.
The marked section of the CFC is enlarged in the working area to maximum size.

Using a Tree
² As soon as the CFC is visible in the working area, an icon will be shown in the lower right corner of the
working area. Click this icon.
A small window opens. The window displays a smaller view of the CFC. The mouse pointer changes into a
rectangular searcher.
² Move the searcher to the area of the CFC that should be displayed in the working area.
The CFC is immediately updated by moving the mouse.
² Release the mouse button as soon as you have reached the desired display.

Related Topics
² 5.1.3 Function Chart
² 5.3.1 Adjusting the Layout in the CFC Data Flow View
² 5.3.4 Adjusting Sheet Bars
² 5.3.5 Showing and Hiding the Grid
² 5.3.3 Overview of Sheet Bars
² 5.2.6 Switching between Control Flow and Data Flow

5.3.3 Overview of Sheet Bars

If you interconnect blocks with sheet bars, you link the function with signals or settings.
For the display of sheet bars, you can select between the following variants:

• Static Sheet Bars

• Dynamic Sheet Bars

• No Sheet Bars

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 55

, Edition 02.2022
Configuring Function Charts (CFC)
5.3 Adjusting Function Chart and Chart View

Static Sheet Bars

A fixed area is reserved at the right and left in the CFC for the sheet bars. This area is exclusively for sheet-bar
entries, for example for cross-chart interconnections.

[sc_le_fixed_sidebars, 1, en_US]

Figure 5-4 CFC with Fixed Sheet Bars

The width of the sheet bars is variable. However, both sheet bars always have the same width.

NOTE

i Connections between blocks which cross a sheet area are split and shown in the sheet bar as cross-sheet
interconnections.

The width of the sheet bars is variable. However, both sheet bars always have the same width.

Dynamic Sheet Bars

A CFC with dynamic sheet bars displays sheet-bar entries only if necessary.
A CFC configured in this way differs from a CFC with fixed sheet bars by way of the following properties:

• You can place blocks or text boxes in the sheet-bar area.

• The sheet-bar area is not marked.

[sc_le_dynamic_sidebars, 1, en_US]

Figure 5-5 CFC with Dynamic Sheet Bars

No Sheet Bars
The CFC is shown without sheet bars. Instead, so-called connectors show the interconnections to the signals
or to the settings. The connectors are placed next to the block interface. Cross-sheet interconnections are
displayed as if they are on one sheet.

NOTE

i Blocks on sheet borders are not completely illustrated when printed. Thus, when configuring without side-
bars, make sure that you did not place blocks on sheet borders. In order to do so, show the sheet borders
when configuring.

56 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
 Configuring Function Charts (CFC)
5.3 Adjusting Function Chart and Chart View

[sc_le_CFC_without_sidebars, 1, en_US]

Figure 5-6 CFC without Sheet Bars

Sheet Bar Expansion

If you create more sheet-bar entries than there is space in the sheet bar, this is automatically expanded. An
arrow is shown in the sheet bar on the lower edge. The following figure shows a sheet bar with sheet-bar
expansion.

[sc_le_sidebarexpansion, 1, en_US]

Figure 5-7 Sheet Bar with Sheet-Bar Expansion

By clicking the arrow, you change to the sheet-bar expansion. The sheet-bar expansion is displayed slightly
offset from the sheet bar. The following figure shows a sheet-bar expansion.

[sc_le_sidebarexpansion_2, 1, en_US]

Figure 5-8 Offset from the Sheet-Bar Expansion

In order to return to the sheet bar, click the arrow on the upper edge.

Related Topics
5.1.3 Function Chart
5.3.4 Adjusting Sheet Bars

5.3.4 Adjusting Sheet Bars

If you interconnect blocks with sheet bars, you link the function with signals or settings.
For the display of sheet bars, you can select between the following variants:

• Static Sheet Bars

• Dynamic Sheet Bars

• No Sheet Bars

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 57

, Edition 02.2022
Configuring Function Charts (CFC)
5.3 Adjusting Function Chart and Chart View

With more settings, you can influence the width of the sheet bar and select between 1-line and 2-line sheet-
bar entries. This is how you get more space in the sheet bar in the horizontal or vertical direction.
You can change the settings for the sheet bars in the CFC properties. The CFC can still be visible in the working
area. In this case, you can also switch between the 3 views with the help of the 17.5.2 Toolbar Data Flow.
However, the CFC must not be opened. In this case, use the project tree in order to display the properties.

Displaying Properties If the CFC Is Opened

² Click in an open area in the CFC.
² Open the Inspector window.
² Select the Properties tab.
² Select the group 13.3 Sheet Bars/Layout.

Showing Properties via the Project Tree

² In the project tree, right-click the CFC whose sheet size and count you wish to change. Click Properties in
the context menu.
The Property dialog for the CFC opens.
² Select the group 13.3 Sheet Bars/Layout.

NOTE

i If you execute the following changes in the Properties dialog, confirm this with OK.

Selecting the Sheet-Bar View in the Properties

² In the Sheet Bars area select one of the following 3 options: Static sheet bars, Dynamic sheet bars, or
No sheet bars.
The sheet-bar view is updated. The connectors are placed either in the sheet bar or next to the block
connection depending on the set sheet-bar view.

Changing Sheet-Bar View with the Toolbar

² In the Data flow view toolbar, click the following symbol:

Depending on the state, you can switch to the next sheet-bar view. The sequence when changing is
Static sheet bars > Dynamic sheet bars > No sheet bars > Static sheet bars.

Setting the Width of the Sheet Bar

² Set a value for the width in the Sheet Bars area with the arrow on the Sheet-Bar width box. The range
of values is 5 grid units to 37 grid units.
- or -
² Enter an integer value from 5 to 37 in the text box of the field.
² Click outside the text box.
- or -
² Press <Enter>.
You confirm your entry with these 2 actions.
The width of the sheet bars is updated.

Changing between 1-Line and 2-Line Sheet-Bar Entries

² In the Sheet-Bars area, click the Double-row sheet-bar entries check box.

58 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
 Configuring Function Charts (CFC)
5.4 Adding and Processing Elements in the Function Chart

- or -
² In the Data flow view toolbar, click the following symbol:

Depending on the current state, the sheet bar changes from the 1-line display to the 2-line display or the other
way.

Related Topics
² 5.1.3 Function Chart
² 5.3.3 Overview of Sheet Bars

5.3.5 Showing and Hiding the Grid

A grid helps you with visual alignment of the blocks in the CFC. You can show and hide this grid.

Showing and Hiding the Grid in the CFC

² Click the following symbol in the 17.5.2 Toolbar Data Flow.

If the grid is hidden, your action shows the grid. If the grid is shown, your action hides the grid.

Related Topics
² 5.1.3 Function Chart
² Adjusting the Sheet Count Automatically, Page 53

5.4 Adding and Processing Elements in the Function Chart

5.4.1 Basic Instructions

The basic instructions contain all instructions that you can use to create the Continuous Function Chart for a
CFC function.
The block types are summarized in the following categories:

• Arithmetic

• Compare

• Edge Detect

• Flip-Flops

• Logic

• Selection

• Timer and Counter

• Power and Exponent

• Trigonometry

• Conversion

• Target System
Detailed information about the individual block types is found in the topic area 17.2.5 Instructions.

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 59

, Edition 02.2022
Configuring Function Charts (CFC)
5.4 Adding and Processing Elements in the Function Chart

Related Topics
5.4.2 Adding a Block in a CFC
17.2.5 Instructions

5.4.2 Adding a Block in a CFC

The block library contains all blocks that you can use to create the Continuous Function Chart for a CFC func-
tion.
You have the following possibilities of adding a block from the block library in the CFC:

• You can add the block via drag and drop.

• You can add the block with copy and paste.

The positioning of blocks in the sheet of a CFC depends on whether you are working with the 17.1.2 Data
Flow or the 17.1.3 Control Flow. In the Data flow view, you can select a position in the CFC during insertion. If
you add blocks in the Control flow view, these are automatically positioned in the data flow at an open area.
You can also have blocks automatically positioned that were originally positioned manually.

Adding a Block by Drag and Drop

² Select the respective block in the block library.
² Drag this with a pressed mouse to the insertion position in the Data flow view or the Control flow view.
If insertion is not allowed at this position, the mouse pointer changes to a crossed-out circle.
² Release the mouse button at a permissible position.
The block is placed at the selected position.

Adding a Block with Copy and Paste

² Right-click the desired block in the block library. Click Copy in the context menu.
² Right-click the desired insertion position in the Data flow or Control flow view. Then click Paste in the
context menu. This menu item is only active if the insertion position is permissible.
The block is placed at the selected position.

Positioning Blocks Automatically

² Right-click the respective block in the Data flow view. Click Automatically positioned in the context
menu.
The selected block is automatically positioned and surrounded by color.

Removing Automatic Positioning

² Right-click the respective block in the Data flow view. Click Automatically positioned in the context
menu.
- or -
² Moving a block in the CFC.
The automatic positioning of the block is disabled. The block is no longer surrounded by color. Without auto-
matic positioning, blocks are added in an overlapping arrangement in the data flow.

60 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
 Configuring Function Charts (CFC)
5.4 Adding and Processing Elements in the Function Chart

NOTE

i Blocks are displayed under the following conditions without interconnections and in a different color:

• With automatic placement: There is not enough space in the sheet of a CFC for all blocks.

• With manual placement: You can position blocks on top of each other, on an interconnection or on a
sheet border.
Interconnections to incompletely displayed blocks are executed as connectors. If blocks are on top of each
other, the lowest block is displayed completely. All of the blocks above this are partially displayed.

Related Topics
² 5.1.3 Function Chart
² 5.4.7 Deleting Elements from the CFC
² 5.4.6 Aligning Elements in the Data Flow View in the CFC

5.4.3 Renaming a Block

You can give each block an individual name. The type name of the block remains unchanged by this.
You have the following possibilities to change the name of a block:

• You can change the name of the block.

• You can change the name in the properties of the block.

In both cases, the 17.1.2 Data Flow must be visible in the working area.

Changing the Name of the Block

² Set the view of the block to show the block-instance name (refer to Displaying the Block, Page 40).

NOTE

i You cannot rename block-type names.

² Double-click the name on the upper edge of the block.

The name is displayed in a text box and is highlighted in color.
² Enter a new name for the block. Follow the naming conventions.
² Click outside of the text box
- or -
² Press <Enter>.
You confirm your entry with these 2 actions.
The name is updated in the block and all reference points.

Changing the Name in the Properties of the Block

² Mark the respective block.
² Open the Inspector window and select the Properties tab.
² Select the group 13.8 Block – General Properties.
² Enter a new name for the block in the Name text box. Follow the naming conventions.
² Click outside of the text box.
- or -

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 61

, Edition 02.2022
Configuring Function Charts (CFC)
5.4 Adding and Processing Elements in the Function Chart

² Press <Enter>.
You confirm your entry with these 2 actions.
The name is updated in the block and all reference points.

Related Topics
² 5.4.1 Basic Instructions

5.4.4 Copying a Block

You have the following possibilities to copy elements like blocks and text boxes:

• You can copy the elements within a CFC.

• You can copy the elements to a different CFC. The other CFC can also be in a different SIPROTEC 5 device
or in another project.
If you copy a block on a cross-device or cross-project basis, the affiliated block type is copied as well. If there is
a block with the same name at the destination, the added block automatically receives a new name.
If you copy a block with an interconnection to an external value, the connector will also be copied with the
name of the external value. However, a new name will be created for the value in the copy of the connector.
Correct the name in order to avoid errors when compiling the CFC.

Copying Elements within a CFC

² In the CFC, right-click the element that you wish to copy.
- or -
² If you wish to copy a number of elements simultaneously, mark these in the CFC. Then right-click a
marked element.
² Click Copy in the context menu.
The elements are copied to the clipboard.
² Right-click an open area in the CFC.
² Click Paste in the context menu.
- or -
² Mark all elements in the CFC that you wish to copy.
² Press the <CTRL> key and drag the marked CFCs to the CFC folder or to the destination group in this
folder.
² Release the mouse button and the <CTRL> key.
Copies of the original elements are added in the CFC. The added elements automatically receive new names in
order to preserve the uniqueness of the names.

Copying Elements between 2 CFCs

² Separate the working area horizontally or vertically.
² In one part of the working area, open the CFC that serves as the source, and, in the other part, open the
CFC that serves as the destination.
² Mark all elements in the CFC that you wish to copy.
² Press the <CTRL> key and drag the marked CFCs to the CFC folder or to the destination group in this
folder.
² Release the mouse button and the <CTRL> key.
Copies of the original elements are added to the destination plan. If elements with the same name exist, the
added elements will automatically receive new names.

62 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
 Configuring Function Charts (CFC)
5.4 Adding and Processing Elements in the Function Chart

NOTE

i When copying, you can also work between 2 CFCs via the context menu.

Related Topics
² 5.4.1 Basic Instructions

5.4.5 Adding and Editing a Text Box in a CFC in the Data Flow View

Use the text boxes in order to add additional information to the CFC. With this, for example, you can docu-
ment a signal characteristic.
You have the following possibilities to configure a text box:

• Changing the size of the text box

• Placing the text box in the background

• Setting the borders of the text box

• Filling the text box with colors or a background image

• Entering text in the text box and formatting the text

You can set the size of the text box interactively. All other settings can be taken care of in the properties of the
text box.

Adding a Text Box in the CFC

²
Click the button in the 17.5.2 Toolbar Data Flow.

This activates the text-box tool.

² Left-click in an open area of the CFC. Drag open a rectangle, holding the mouse button down.
² Release the mouse button as soon as the rectangle reaches the desired size.
The text box is added in the predefined size.
- or -
² Right-click in an open area of the CFC. Then click in the context menu on Add text box.
The text box is added in the predefined standard size.

Changing the Size of the Text Box

² Mark the text box.
8 white corner points will be displayed around the text box.
² Click one of these corners, keep the mouse button pressed and change the size of the text box by moving
the mouse.

Displaying the Properties of the Text Box

² Mark the text box.
² Open the Inspector window and select the Properties tab.

Placing the Text Box in the Background

² In the Properties tab select the 13.5 Text Box – General group.
² Mark the check box Text box in background.

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 63

, Edition 02.2022
Configuring Function Charts (CFC)
5.4 Adding and Processing Elements in the Function Chart

The text box is now in the background level. Thus, you can also position interconnections and blocks through
the text box.

Setting the Borders of the Text Box

² In the Properties tab, select the General group.
² In the Border Width text box, enter a value between 0 and 20 or set a value from 0 to 20 with the slider
next to the text box.
The border width is adjusted.
² From the Border color list box, select a color for the border.
The border color is adjusted.

Filling the Text Box with Color

² In the Properties tab, select the group General.
² Select a fill color for the text box from the Background color list box.
The fill color is adjusted.

Entering a Text in the Text Box and Formatting the Text

² In the Properties tab select the group Text.
² In the text box Text, enter the text that should be displayed in the text box.
Press the <SHIFT> and <ENTER> keys to add a new line in the text box.

² Click outside of the text box or press <ENTER>.

The entered text is displayed in the text box.
² Format the text if necessary. You can set the font, font size, text color, alignment, and select the check
box to wrap lines automatically.

Related Topics
² 5.1.3 Function Chart
² 5.4.7 Deleting Elements from the CFC
² 5.4.6 Aligning Elements in the Data Flow View in the CFC

5.4.6 Aligning Elements in the Data Flow View in the CFC

You can align and place elements such as blocks and text boxes together in the CFC.
For this, mark at least 2 elements and select one of the following possibilities:

• Align left

• Center horizontally

• Align right

• Align top

• Center vertically

• Align bottom
Mark at least 3 elements and select one of the following possibilities:

• Distribute horizontally

• Distribute vertically
The reference element which is used for orienting the other elements is automatically determined.

64 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
 Configuring Function Charts (CFC)
5.5 Interconnection of Blocks in the Data Flow View

The following criteria apply:

• Aligning
The marked elements are aligned together. The element whose position is closest to the desired align-
ment is used as a reference element. Example: If you wish to align the 3 elements to the right, the
elements are aligned to that element which is furthest to the right.

• Distributing
The marked elements are distributed equally. The position average of all marked elements is used as a
base value.

Aligning Elements
² Mark at least 2 elements in the CFC.
² Right-click a marked element. Click Align in the context menu.
A submenu is displayed.
² Select one of the actions listed from this submenu.
The marked elements are aligned or distributed.

Related Topics
² 5.1.3 Function Chart

5.4.7 Deleting Elements from the CFC

You can delete blocks in the 17.1.2 Data Flow and in the 17.1.3 Control Flow. You can only delete text boxes
in the Data flow view.

NOTE

i If you delete an interconnected block, you also delete the interconnections. The interfaces of the originally
interconnected blocks are set to the standard values of the block type.

Deleting Blocks or Text Boxes from the CFC

² Right-click the element that you wish to delete. If you wish to delete a number of elements at the same
time, mark these and then right-click one of the elements.
² Click Delete in the context menu.
The marked elements are deleted from the CFC.

Related Topics
² 5.1.3 Function Chart

5.5 Interconnection of Blocks in the Data Flow View

5.5.1 Displaying Interconnections

When configuring interconnections, you only determine which block output is interconnected with which
block input. The exact route is created automatically. Other elements in the CFC are bypassed in the process. If
you have specified a text box as Text box in background, this will be ignored during routing of the connec-
tion line. The connection lines can also be above this text box. If you move interconnected blocks, the auto-
matic routing adjusts the interconnections.
The following figure displays the routing of an interconnection around a 3rd block:

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 65

, Edition 02.2022
Configuring Function Charts (CFC)
5.5 Interconnection of Blocks in the Data Flow View

Interconnections from a Block Output to Multiple Block Inputs

You can connect a block output to one or more block inputs. An interconnection node is added for each junc-
tion point to a block input. An interconnection node corresponds with an interconnection on the block output.
If you move an interconnection node with drag and drop to a block output, this connects all of the intercon-
nections coming from this node with this block output.
The following figure displays an interconnection of a block output to 2 block inputs with one interconnection
node:

Incompletely Displayed Interconnections

Each block and each interconnection requires space in the CFC. Automatic connectors are used for incom-
pletely displayed interconnections. The following figure shows an incompletely displayable interconnection
between 2 blocks:

Connectors with the same numbers represent the interconnection. With multiple connectors, the numbers are
numbered continually.

Signal Tracking for Interconnections

If you click a connection line, the interconnection will be highlighted in color. If the block outputs are multiply
interconnected, the click position is decisive for which interconnection is highlighted. Depending on the click
position, all interconnections or only some of them will be highlighted.

5.5.2 Interconnecting Blocks

If you interconnect 2 blocks, then you always interconnect a block output with a block input. If you point to a
block during the interconnection, possible destination positions are marked in color.

[sc_le_interconnecting_blocks, 1, en_US]

66 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
 Configuring Function Charts (CFC)
5.5 Interconnection of Blocks in the Data Flow View

A block output and a block input can be connected if their data types are the same or compatible. Compatible
data types are not the same, but they can be converted. The conversion of compatible data types takes place
automatically. Other information about data types and its conversion are found under 5.5.10 Converting Data
Types.
The following rules apply for interconnecting blocks:

• You can only interconnect a block input once.

• You can interconnect a block output a number of times.

You have the following possibilities to interconnect blocks:

• You can interconnect blocks in the 17.1.2 Data Flow . In this case, you can interconnect the blocks with
drag and drop.

• You can interconnect blocks in the 17.1.3 Control Flow. In this case, you can interconnect the blocks
through text entry.
You can interconnect a block output with a number of block inputs. In order to create such multiple intercon-
nections, connect the block output with the different inputs of the destination blocks. One or more intercon-
nection nodes arise depending on the positions of the destination blocks. Place the blocks with multiple inter-
connections on the CFC so that only a few interconnection nodes arise.

Interconnecting Blocks by Drag and Drop

² Select the Data flow view.
² Click the block output that you wish to interconnect.
An interconnection line is displayed between the block output and the mouse pointer.
² Drag the connection line to the block input that you wish to interconnect.
If the block input is ideal as a destination, it will be shown in color.
² Click the block input.
The block connections of the 2 blocks are interconnected. Depending on the available space in the CFC, the
interconnection is either displayed completely or through connectors.

Interconnect Blocks by Text

² Select the Control flow view.
² Assign an interconnection destination to the block output that you wish to interconnect. To do this,
select the syntax Plan name\Block name.Connection name. An example for an interconnection is
Chart_1\AND.IN2.

Creating Multiple Interconnections

² Select the Data flow view.
² Double-click the block output that you wish to multiply interconnect.
An interconnection line is displayed between the block output and the mouse pointer.
² Drag the connection line to the block input that you wish to interconnect.
If the block input is ideal as a destination, it will be shown in color.
² Click the block input.
The block connections of the 2 blocks are interconnected. Depending on the available space in the CFC, the
interconnection is either displayed completely or through connectors.

Canceling Interconnection
² Click in an open area of the CFC.
- or -
² Press <Esc>.

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 67

, Edition 02.2022
Configuring Function Charts (CFC)
5.5 Interconnection of Blocks in the Data Flow View

In both cases, the interconnection line between the block output and the mouse pointer will be hidden.

Related Topics
² 5.5.1 Displaying Interconnections
² 5.5.7 Displaying the Interconnections of a Block
² 5.5.4 Negating a Block Input
² 5.5.3 Interconnecting a Block with a Signal
² 5.5.10 Converting Data Types

5.5.3 Interconnecting a Block with a Signal

Signals from the signal catalog can be connected to a block.

You can add the signals from the signal catalog in the function chart via drag and drop.
The signals are structured in a hierarchical manner. In the signal list tree, you can navigate through the struc-
ture and show or hide individual levels. In the filter bar above the signal list you can enter a text which is used
for filtering the signal list.

Opening the Signal Catalog and Selecting a Signal

² In the task card, go to the 17.2.2 Signals tab.
The signals of current device are displayed in the signal catalog.

68 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
 Configuring Function Charts (CFC)
5.5 Interconnection of Blocks in the Data Flow View

² Open further levels in the signal structure until you can select the desired signal or signal element (refer
to Selecting a Signal Element, Page 34).

Interconnecting a Block with a Signal

² Mark the desired signal in the signal catalog.
² Drag this into the CFC by pressing the mouse and then moving it to the input or output of the respective
block.
If the signal can be interconnected with the selected connection, the connection will be highlighted in color. If
the interconnection is not possible, the mouse pointer will change into a crossed-out circle.
² Release the mouse button.
If the interconnection is permissible, the signal will be interconnected with the connection. The signal name is
entered in the respective sidebar. An interconnection line connects the sidebar cell with the connection. If you
have hidden the sidebars, a connector displays the interconnection with the signal.

Related Topics
² 5.5.1 Displaying Interconnections

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 69

, Edition 02.2022
Configuring Function Charts (CFC)
5.5 Interconnection of Blocks in the Data Flow View

5.5.4 Negating a Block Input

You can negate the input of a type BOOL block. The block must be interconnected as a prerequisite. If you
move or copy the negated interconnection, the negation remains intact. You can deactivate the negation at
any time.

[sc_le_negate_kreis, 1, --_--]

Figure 5-9 Example of Negated Interconnection

In order to negate a block input or to remove the negation, you have the following possibilities:

• You can enable or disable the negation with the context menu from an interconnection.

• You can enable or disable the negation in the properties of an interconnection.

Enabling or Disabling a Negation with the Context Menu of an Interconnection

² Right-click the interconnection. Click Negate in the context menu.

Depending on the previous state, the block input will be negated or the negation will be disabled.

Enabling or Disabling a Negation in the Properties of an Interconnection

² Mark the interconnection.
² Open the 1.1.4 Inspector Window.
² Select the Properties tab.
² Select the group 13.12 Interconnection.
² Click the Negate check box.

Depending on the previous state, the block input will be negated or the negation will be disabled.

70 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
 Configuring Function Charts (CFC)
5.5 Interconnection of Blocks in the Data Flow View

Related Topics
² 5.5.1 Displaying Interconnections

5.5.5 Changing Block Interconnections

You can change the interconnections afterwards. In order to change an interconnection, use the processing
areas of the interconnection. If you place the mouse on an interconnection, these processing areas will be
automatically marked.
The following figure shows the processing areas for a multiple interconnection:

1) Represents the Interconnection of the Block AND_1 Input

In order to place this interconnection on a different block input, click this processing area and drag
it to the other block input.
2) Represents the Interconnection of the Output of the OR_1 Block
In order to place this interconnection on a different block output, click this processing area and
drag it to the other block output. The interconnection no longer belongs to the multiple intercon-
nection.
3) Represents a Part of the Interconnection of the Output of the OR_1 Block
If multiple interconnection nodes exist, these are divided in a hierarchical manner. In order to place
all interconnections connected with this node onto a different block output, click this processing
area and drag it to the other block output. The interconnection no longer belongs to the multiple
interconnection.
4) Represents all Interconnections of the Output of the OR_1 Block
In order to interconnect all block inputs with a different block output, click this processing area and
drag it to the other block output.

Related Topics
5.5.1 Displaying Interconnections

5.5.6 Deleting a Block Interconnection

You can delete an individual block interconnection or multiple block interconnections simultaneously. The
deletion of an interconnection disables the negation of a block input.

Deleting One or More Interconnections

² Right-click the interconnection that you wish to delete. Click Delete in the context menu.

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 71

, Edition 02.2022
Configuring Function Charts (CFC)
5.5 Interconnection of Blocks in the Data Flow View

- or -
² Mark one or more interconnections that you wish to delete.
²
Click the button in the 17.5.1 Logic Editor Toolbar.

The interconnections are deleted in both cases.

Related Topics
² 5.5.1 Displaying Interconnections

5.5.7 Displaying the Interconnections of a Block

You can display the interconnections that leave from or lead to a block.

Displaying the Interconnections of a Block

² Mark the respective block in the 17.1.3 Control Flow or in the 17.1.2 Data Flow .
² Open the 1.1.4 Inspector Window.
² Select the Info tab.
² Select the Cross-reference tab.
All interconnections of the block are displayed in table form.

Related Topics
² 5.5.1 Displaying Interconnections

5.5.8 Showing/Hiding Block Connections

In order to create more space in the CFC to display blocks or interconnections, you can hide the block connec-
tions. If the block connections are hidden, then the affiliated interconnection lines are not visible. Connectors
replace the lines. This is how you can arrive at a better overview in the CFC.
Triangle symbols on the lower edge of the block inform you about hidden connections - separately for inputs
and outputs. A filled triangle means that one or more Interconnected connections are hidden. A triangle
contour means that one or more Not interconnected connections are hidden.
If blocks have a number of inputs of the same type, only 2 of them are visible by default. However, logic
blocks like AND or NOR each have 10 inputs. If these inputs are shown, you can usually avoid the cascading of
blocks.
For showing and hiding connections, you can use the 17.1.2 Data Flow and the 17.1.3 Control Flow.
However, you can only see the descriptive symbols in the Data flow view.

NOTE

i If you interconnect an output with an input from the same block and hide both connections, the intercon-
nection is invisible. Only the symbols on the block refer to interconnected, hidden connections. Siemens
recommends not to hide any interconnected block connections.

NOTE

i If a block input is hidden, this is still effective. For example, hidden inputs set to 0 of an AND block result in
an error. Therefore, hidden inputs are always initialized neutrally by default, that is, with 1 for AND blocks
and with 0 for OR blocks.

72 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
 Configuring Function Charts (CFC)
5.5 Interconnection of Blocks in the Data Flow View

Hiding Individual Block Connection

² Mark the block connection.
² Open the 1.1.4 Inspector Window.
² Select the Properties tab.
² Select the 13.11 Terminal – General group.
² Mark the Invisible check box.
The block connection is then hidden. If the connection is interconnected, connectors replace the interconnec-
tion lines.

Hiding Multiple Connections of a Block

² Mark the block.
² Open the 1.1.4 Inspector Window.
² Select the Properties tab.
² Select the group 13.9 Interface.
² Mark the Invisible check box for all connections that you wish to hide.
The block connections are then hidden. If the connections are interconnected, connectors replace the inter-
connection lines.

Showing One or More Connections of a Block

² Mark the block.
² Open the 1.1.4 Inspector Window.
² Select the Properties tab.
² Select the I/Os group.
- or -
² If the block is interconnected, you can also select the Invisible interconnections group.
² Mark the Invisible check box for all connections that you wish to show.
The block connections are then shown. If the connections are interconnected, interconnection lines replace
the connectors.

Related Topics
² 5.5.1 Displaying Interconnections
² 5.5.7 Displaying the Interconnections of a Block

5.5.9 Setting Parameters for Block Connections

If you add a block in a CFC, the connections are preassigned with the current standard values for the block
type. If the standard values for the block type change, these values are transmitted to the block in the CFC.
If you set parameters to the block connections, the inheritance of the standard values to the block type will be
disrupted. You can reactivate the propagation at any time. The start value of the block instance then replaces
the parameterized value.
When setting parameters, the entered value is checked for plausibility and syntax depending on the data type.
You can optionally select a unit for the value for each connection.
For the parameterization of connections, you can use both the 17.1.2 Data Flow and the 17.1.3 Control Flow.
If you wish to set parameters for the connections with a number of blocks, Siemens recommends using the
Control flow view to save time.

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 73

, Edition 02.2022
Configuring Function Charts (CFC)
5.5 Interconnection of Blocks in the Data Flow View

Entering Values for Individual Block Connection

² Mark the block connection.
² Open the Inspector window.
² Select the Properties tab.
² Select the 13.11 Terminal – General group.
² Enter a value for the connection in the Value text box.
² Click outside of the text box.
- or -
² Press the <Enter> button.
You confirm your entry with these 2 actions. A plausibility and syntax verification checks the value. If the value
is permissible, it is accepted. Otherwise, you will receive a warning.
² You can optionally select a unit from the Unit list box for the entered value.

Entering Values for Multiple Block Connections

² Mark the block.
² Open the Inspector window.
² Select the Properties tab.
² Select the group 13.9 Interface.
² Enter a value for the connections in the Value text box.
² After text input, click outside of the text box.
- or -
² After each text input, press the <Enter> button.
You confirm your entry with these 2 actions. A plausibility and syntax verification checks the value. If the value
is permissible, it is accepted. Otherwise, you will receive a warning.
² You can optionally select units from the Unit list box for the entered value.

Entering Values for a Number of Blocks

² Change to the Control flow view.
²
If only the blocks are displayed, click the button in the 17.5.3 Toolbar of the Control Flow.

All blocks and block connections are displayed.

² In the cells to the right of the connection names, enter the values for the connections.
² After each text entry, click a position outside of the cell.
- or -
² After each text input, press the <Enter> button.
You confirm your entry with these 2 actions. A plausibility and syntax verification checks the value. If the value
is permissible, it is accepted. Otherwise, you will receive a warning.

Resetting Block Connection to the Standard Value

² Mark the block connection.
² Open the 1.1.4 Inspector Window.
² Select the Properties tab.
² Select the 13.11 Terminal – General group.

74 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
 Configuring Function Charts (CFC)
5.5 Interconnection of Blocks in the Data Flow View

² Mark the check box to the right of the Value text box.
The value of the block connection is restored to the standard value. The inheritance is reactivated.

Related Topics
² 5.5.8 Showing/Hiding Block Connections

5.5.10 Converting Data Types

The CFC blocks process data types depending on the supported data types listed in 9 Data Types and Data
Structures.
If you wish to connect 2 connections with different data types to each other, there is an automatic test to see
if a type conversion is possible. If that is the case, you can connect both of the connections with each other.
You do not have to add a conversion block. The data types are automatically converted during the compilation
of the CFC.
When connecting, green markings show that a conversion is possible. If a data type cannot be converted into
a different type, you also cannot combine the corresponding connections with each other.

5.5.11 Inter-Chart Connection (ICC)

You can also connect blocks belonging to different plans (charts).

However, there are 2 conditions:

• The plans belong to the same resource.

• The block output and the block input to be connected have the same data type.
A valid connection is highlighted – like when drawing connections within a plan.
After drawing the inter-chart connection, there is an entry displayed in the sidebars of each plan. This entry is
no distinct element, but only a placeholder for the connection. The name cannot be changed, it is automati-
cally derived from plan name, block name, input, and output.

[sc_icc, 1, en_US]

Figure 5-10 2 Plans with Connected Blocks

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 75

, Edition 02.2022
Configuring Function Charts (CFC)
5.6 Forcing of a Block IO

5.6 Forcing of a Block IO

5.6.1 Forcing Single Block IO Inputs and Outputs

Values of a block IO can be changed to test the runtime behaviour or to search for errors without having to
compile and upload several times. To force a value, the value has to be added to the forcing in the offline
mode and activated in the online mode.
The options for the forcing functionality can be found in several places:

• Under the General group in the Properties tab.

• Under the Interface group in the Properties tab.

• In the Control flow tab.

Adding forcing
You are in the offline mode.
² Open the CFC.
² Select the block IO.
² Select the Add forcing option.
The value is written to the Force table.
A green rectangle appears at the corresponding value in the Data flow view.

Activating forcing for connected blocks

² Start the CFC online analysis by selecting the symbol.

² Enter the desired value in the Force value field.

² Select Activate forcing.
A red rectangle appears at the corresponding value in the Data flow view.
The value is written to the device.

Activating forcing for unconnected blocks

² Start the CFC online analysis by selecting the symbol.

² Enter the desired value in the Value field.

The value is written to the device.

Related Topics
² 5.6.2 Forcing Multiple Block IO Inputs and Outputs

5.6.2 Forcing Multiple Block IO Inputs and Outputs

In case you want to test multiple values with the forcing function, the use of the Force table is recommended.
To force a value, the value has to be added to the forcing in the offline mode and activated in the online
mode.

Adding forcing
You are in the offline mode.
² Open the CFC.
² Select the block IO.

76 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
 Configuring Function Charts (CFC)
5.7 User Interface

² Select the Add forcing option in one of the following ways:

² You can select the option under the General group in the Properties tab.
- or -
² You can select the option under the Interface group in the Properties tab.
- or -
² You can select the option in the Control flow tab.
The value is written to the Force table.
A green rectangle appears at the corresponding value in the Data flow view.

Activating forcing for connected blocks

² Start the CFC online analysis by selecting the symbol.

² Navigate to the Charts - Trend/dynamic display & force table display folder.
² Select the Force table.
² Enter the desired value in the Force value field.
² Select Activate forcing.
A red rectangle appears at the corresponding value in the Data flow view.
The value is written to the device.

Activating forcing for unconnected blocks

² Start the CFC online analysis by selecting the symbol.

² Navigate to the Charts - Trend/dynamic display & force table display folder.
² Select the Force table.
² Enter the desired value in the Value field.
The value is written to the device.

Related Topics
² 5.6.1 Forcing Single Block IO Inputs and Outputs

5.7 User Interface

5.7.1 Adjusting the Running Sequence of Blocks

The order in which you add the blocks in the CFC determines the running sequence within the overall func-
tion. They recognize the running sequence by the so-called sequence number, which can be displayed in the
block. You can show or hide these numbers for all blocks in general.
If you add blocks in a different sequence than that in which these blocks should be processed, also change the
running sequence retrospectively. You can change the running sequence in the 17.1.3 Control Flow.
You can identify a block in the running sequence as the position for the block insertion. Newly added blocks
are then integrated in the running sequence after this block position.

Showing or Hiding the Sequence Number in the Block

²
Click the button in the 17.5.2 Toolbar Data Flow.

Depending on the current state, the sequence numbers in the blocks are shown or hidden.

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 77

, Edition 02.2022
Configuring Function Charts (CFC)
5.7 User Interface

Changing the Running Sequence of a Block

² Mark the respective block in the Control flow view.
² Drag the block with pressed mouse button in a vertical direction to the position of a different block.
If insertion is not allowed at this position, the mouse pointer changes to a crossed-out circle.
² Release the mouse button at a permissible position.
The block is inserted at the new position.

Identifying the Block as a Position for Block Insertion

² Right-click the respective block in the 17.1.2 Data Flow .
² Click Position for block insertion in the context menu.
The selected block is immediately the starting position for newly added blocks.

Related Topics
² 5.1.6 Flow Model
² 5.1.3 Function Chart
² 5.7.2 Optimizing the Running Sequence Automatically

5.7.2 Optimizing the Running Sequence Automatically

The running sequence can be optimized automatically. Automatic optimization of the running sequence is
based on the fact that blocks whose output values serve as input values for different blocks are executed first.
A prerequisite for optimization is that blocks be completely interconnected. You then determine which CFCs
should be optimized.

Selecting the CFC for Optimization

² In the project tree, right-click the CFC that should be optimized.
² Click Properties in the context menu.
The property dialog for the CFC opens.
² Mark the Optimize chart(s) check box.
² Click OK.
- or -
² Open the CFC that is to be optimized in the working area.
² Click in an open area in the CFC.
² Open the Inspector window.
² Select the Properties tab.
² Select the General group.
² Mark the Optimize chart check box.
The CFCs are selected for optimization.

Optimizing the CFC

² In the project tree, right-click the CFC that should be optimized.
² Click Optimize chart in the context menu. This menu item is active only if the CFC has been selected for
optimization.
The CFC is optimized.

78 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
 Configuring Function Charts (CFC)
5.8 Checking and Finishing Function Chart

Related Topics
² 5.1.6 Flow Model
² 5.1.3 Function Chart
² 5.7.1 Adjusting the Running Sequence of Blocks

NOTE

i If the Optimize chart option is selected for a chart, the optimization of this chart is always performed
during the compilation. The option is selected by default.

5.8 Checking and Finishing Function Chart

5.8.1 Checking Consistency

If you execute an action during the creation of a chart, the result of this action will be checked for consistency.
Depending on the type of action, the inspection will occur directly after the action or during the translation of
the Continuous Function Chart. In both cases, you will receive notifications about inconsistencies in the form
of warnings or error indications. These indications are entered in a list in the Translate tab.
The following list shows possible causes for warning or error indications:

• A signal is only used in the sidebar and is not interconnected.

• An interconnection between 2 CFCs is not permissible.

• An element in the sheet bar is not available or has an incorrect data type.

• A block type cannot be updated.

• The CFCs require more resources than a device has.

• An incompatible block type for this level is being used on an task level.

• The output of a block is interconnected with the input of a block that has already been processed in the
running sequence (feedback path).

Displaying the List with Warnings and Error Indications

² Open the Inspector window.
² Select the Info tab.
² Select the Compile tab.
The list with warning and error indications is displayed.

Related Topics
² 5.8.2 Compiling the CFC

5.8.2 Compiling the CFC

To use CFC in the device, the function charts have to be compiled into an executable program and transferred
to the device as part of the configuration.
You can compile all function charts by clicking Compile in the toolbar. If you load the configuration to the
device, you will be warned if the configuration has not yet been compiled.
Depending on the level you have selected in the tree, you can compile a single chart, all charts of an Extended
Processing, or all charts of the device.

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 79

, Edition 02.2022
Configuring Function Charts (CFC)
5.9 CFC-Plan Access Protection

During compilation, consistency checks are done. If any inconstancy is found, an error message is added in the
Compile tab of the Info window and the compilation is canceled. A device configuration with inconsistencies
in function charts cannot be loaded to the device.
Furthermore, the resource consumption of the created charts is calculated and written in the Compile tab.

Starting Compilation
² Click the Compile icon in the toolbar.

NOTE

i Compiling will compile all the available plans, except the ones with deactivated Code generation (see
13.4 Advanced).

NOTE

i The Compile icon is active if a tree node is selected in the Project tree that is capable of compiling.

The compilation process starts. An indication informs you about the status of the compilation. Possible
warning or error indications are entered in a list in the Compile tab.

NOTE

i If the Optimize chart option is selected for a chart, the optimization of this chart is always performed
during the compilation. The option is selected by default.

5.8.3 Bumpless Reload

Bumpless Reload is supported for the device types CP-8031 and CP-8050.

What is Bumpless Reload?

Bumpless Reload provides the ability to make changes in the CFC and load those changes "bumpless" (incre-
mental) into the target system without stopping the control. The old values persist when compiling and
uploading to the target system.

Prerequisite
Target system and Logic Editor are synchronized, that means there was at least 1 successful compilation
loaded into the target system.

Workflow
The button Compile as well as the context menu entries Compile on device and resource level contain the
bumpless reload functionality.
Via Upload to Device the bumplessly reloadable code gets loaded into the target system.

Exceptions
In the context menues at resource and device level, there is the additional context menu entry Compile
without reload code. If a resource is compiled using this command, it loses the ability of bumpless reloading.
The values in the CFC are initialized with their initial values.

5.9 CFC-Plan Access Protection

To protect a CFC plan or hierarchical CFC plan from unintentional editing, you can password the plan.

80 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
 Configuring Function Charts (CFC)
5.9 CFC-Plan Access Protection

The password is only used to protect against unintentional editing of the CFC plan. It is not intended to
increase access security.
The password provides

• no protection against unauthorized access to know-how in CFC plans,

• no security-relevant authorization to access CFC plans.

Setting the Access Protection

The access protection is set via the Access protection... command in the context menu of the CFC.

[sc_cfc_accessprot, 1, en_US]

A protected CFC plan is displayed with a small lock in the 1.1.2 Project Tree:

Related Topics
8.14 UFB Access Protection

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 81

, Edition 02.2022
6 Configuring CFC Trend View

6.1 Brief Introduction to CFC Trend View 83

6.2 Adding a Trend Display 84
6.3 Adding a Dynamic Display 84
6.4 Adding Analog Axis in the Trend Display Editor 85
6.5 Adding a Digital Axis in the Trend Display Editor 86
6.6 Assigning Analog IO Terminals of a CFC Block to a Trend Display 86
6.7 Assigning Digital IO Terminals of a CFC Block to a Trend Display 87
6.8 Assigning IO Terminals between Trend Displays 88
6.9 Assigning IO Terminals between Trend Displays via Project Tree 89
6.10 Assigning IO Terminals of a CFC block to the Dynamic Display Editor 90
6.11 Deleting CFC Block/CFC Chart after Assigning their Terminals to the Trend Display/ 91
Dynamic Display Editor
6.12 Watching Values in Trend/Dynamic Display while CFC Online Analysis (Monitoring) is in 91
Progress
6.13 Watching Values in the Trend/Dynamic Display while CFC Offline Analysis is in Progress 93

82 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
 Configuring CFC Trend View
6.1 Brief Introduction to CFC Trend View

6.1 Brief Introduction to CFC Trend View

During the analysis of CFC charts via Online analysis (Simulation), the value at the CFC block terminals
changes continuously depending on the value of the input signal or status. The Trend View editor allows you
to view the continuous changes at the block terminals in the form of graphical representation and simulate
the various conditions based on a changing input-signal value and status. With this editor, you can select the
CFC terminal block and view the signal or value status at the terminal block during the CFC analysis. You can
monitor multiple static and online values.
You must configure the trend display by assigning the terminals in the 17.1.4 Trend Display Editor or the
17.1.5 Dynamic Display Editor editor. Based on this configuration, you can view the continuous changes in
the configured trends. Trend display allows you to visualize multiple values in a trend chart. Dynamic display
allows you to visualize multiple values in a table. The compilations of selected tags/parameters are stored for
reuse.

Overview of the Trend Display

• The trend display configured in the editor window consists of the following objects:
– Definition table
– Trend window with operator controls and trend chart

• The parameters to be monitored can be added to the trend display as follows:

– Using drag and drop with trend display opened in the editor window, or using copy/paste to the
definition table. The parameter inserted by you can be assigned directly to an axis.
– If the trend display is not open, you can drag and drop the parameter to the trend display in the
project tree. In this case, the parameter is assigned automatically to an appropriate axis (digital/
analog). If it does not yet exist, the axis is generated automatically.

• The values are assigned to digital and analog axes and displayed. A trend display may contain several
digital and analog axes.

• You can print the trend display.

– The table of axis and trend definitions is printed when the trend display from the project tree is
printed.
– The trend chart can be printed when the trend display is open.

• The values of the trend chart can be exported or imported in CSV format.

Overview of the Dynamic Display

• The parameters to be monitored can be added to the dynamic display as follows:

– Using drag and drop with dynamic display opened in the editor window, or using copy/paste to the
definition table.
– If the dynamic display is not open, you can drag and drop the parameter to the corresponding
dynamic display in the project tree.

• You can print the dynamic display from the project tree. In the offline mode, the offline values are
printed, while the online mode prints the online values.

Data Storage
The data of trend and dynamic display as well as for test data are stored in a way so that they are preserved in
Logic Editor even if, for example, a device has been renamed or copied via the SICAM Device Manager.
However, since these data are not stored in the device itself, they are not available anymore when you retrieve
the data from the device.

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 83

, Edition 02.2022
Configuring CFC Trend View
6.2 Adding a Trend Display

6.2 Adding a Trend Display

To add a new trend display, proceed as follows:
² Open the project tree.
² Double-click the Charts - Trend/dynamic display & force table display folder.
The element Add new trend display is displayed.
² Double-click Add new trend display.
The new trend display is created successfully with the default name Trend_1.

[sc_le_add_trend_display, 1, en_US]

Related Topics
² 17.1.4 Trend Display Editor
² 5.1.3 Function Chart
² 5.2.5 Deleting CFCs
² 5.2.3 Renaming a Function Chart (CFC)
² 5.2.2 Opening a CFC
² 5.2.4 Copying a CFC

6.3 Adding a Dynamic Display

To add a new dynamic display, proceed as follows:
² Open the project tree.
² Double-click the Charts - Trend/dynamic display & force table display folder.

84 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
 Configuring CFC Trend View
6.4 Adding Analog Axis in the Trend Display Editor

The element Add new dynamic display is displayed.

² Double-click Add new dynamic display.
The new dynamic display is created successfully with the default name Watch table_1.

[sc_le_add_dyn_display, 1, en_US]

Related Topics
² 17.1.5 Dynamic Display Editor
² 5.1.3 Function Chart
² 5.2.5 Deleting CFCs
² 5.2.3 Renaming a Function Chart (CFC)
² 5.2.2 Opening a CFC
² 5.2.4 Copying a CFC

6.4 Adding Analog Axis in the Trend Display Editor

To add an analog axis in the 17.1.4 Trend Display Editor editor, proceed as follows:
² Open the Trend display editor configured with a trend display (for example, Trend_1).
The Trend view is displayed in the working area
²
Click the symbol.

The analog axis is created and displayed with the default name Axis_1.

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 85

, Edition 02.2022
Configuring CFC Trend View
6.5 Adding a Digital Axis in the Trend Display Editor

[sc_le_add_analog_axis, 1, en_US]

Related Topics
² 17.1.4 Trend Display Editor
² 5.1.3 Function Chart
² 5.2.5 Deleting CFCs
² 5.2.3 Renaming a Function Chart (CFC)
² 5.2.2 Opening a CFC
² 5.2.4 Copying a CFC

6.5 Adding a Digital Axis in the Trend Display Editor

To add the digital axis in the 17.1.4 Trend Display Editor , proceed as follows:
² Open the trend display editor configured with a trend display (for example, Trend_1).
The Trend view is displayed in the working area.
²
Click the symbol.

The digital axis is created and displayed with the default name Digital axis_1.

[sc_le_add_digital_axis, 1, en_US]

Related Topics
² 17.1.4 Trend Display Editor
² 5.1.3 Function Chart
² 5.2.5 Deleting CFCs
² 5.2.3 Renaming a Function Chart (CFC)
² 5.2.2 Opening a CFC
² 5.2.4 Copying a CFC

6.6 Assigning Analog IO Terminals of a CFC Block to a Trend Display

To assign analog IO terminals of a CFC block to a digital axis, proceed as follows:
² Open the 17.1.4 Trend Display Editor containing analog axis (for example, Axis_1).
²
Click the symbol in the Logic Editor toolbar to view and work with the Trend display editor and with
the CFC chart editor simultaneously.
² Add a new CFC chart and instantiate the CFC blocks which have the analog type terminals.

86 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
 Configuring CFC Trend View
6.7 Assigning Digital IO Terminals of a CFC Block to a Trend Display

² Connect compatible analog signals or settings to the CFC block IO terminals.

² Drag and drop the analog terminals from the CFC blocks to the analog axis in the Trend display editor.
Analog IO terminals are successfully added to the analog axis.

[sc_le_adding_analog_IO_terminals, 1, en_US]

Related Topics
² 17.1.4 Trend Display Editor
² 5.1.3 Function Chart
² 5.2.5 Deleting CFCs
² 5.2.3 Renaming a Function Chart (CFC)
² 5.2.2 Opening a CFC
² 5.2.4 Copying a CFC

6.7 Assigning Digital IO Terminals of a CFC Block to a Trend Display

To assign digital IO terminals of a CFC block to a digital axis, proceed as follows:
² Open the 17.1.4 Trend Display Editor containing a digital axis (for example, Digital axis_1).
²
Click the symbol in the Logic Editor toolbar to view and work with the Trend display editor and with
the CFC chart editor simultaneously.
² Add a new CFC chart and instantiate the CFC blocks which have the digital type terminals.
² Connect compatible digital signals or settings to the CFC block IO terminals.

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 87

, Edition 02.2022
Configuring CFC Trend View
6.8 Assigning IO Terminals between Trend Displays

² Drag and drop the digital terminals from the CFC blocks to the digital axis in the trend display editor.
Digital IO terminals are successfully added to the digital axis.

[sc_le_adding_digital_io_terminals, 1, en_US]

Related Topics
² 17.1.4 Trend Display Editor
² 5.1.3 Function Chart
² 5.2.5 Deleting CFCs
² 5.2.3 Renaming a Function Chart (CFC)
² 5.2.2 Opening a CFC
² 5.2.4 Copying a CFC

6.8 Assigning IO Terminals between Trend Displays

To assign IO terminals from one trend display to another trend display, proceed as follows:
² Open the 17.1.4 Trend Display Editor configured with 2 or more trend displays (for example, Trend_1
and Trend_2) with the respective analog axis and digital axis assigned with IO terminals.
²
Click the symbol in the Logic Editor toolbar to work with 2 open Trend display editor windows simul-
taneously.
² Drag and drop any assigned IO terminal from the Trend_1 display to the Trend_2 display.
IO terminals are successfully moved from the source trend display to the target trend display.

88 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
 Configuring CFC Trend View
6.9 Assigning IO Terminals between Trend Displays via Project Tree

[sc_le_assigning_between_trend_displays, 1, en_US]

Related Topics
² 17.1.4 Trend Display Editor
² 5.1.3 Function Chart
² 5.2.5 Deleting CFCs
² 5.2.3 Renaming a Function Chart (CFC)
² 5.2.2 Opening a CFC
² 5.2.4 Copying a CFC

6.9 Assigning IO Terminals between Trend Displays via Project Tree

To assign IO terminals from one trend display to another trend display via the project tree, proceed as follows:
² Open the 17.1.4 Trend Display Editor configured with 2 or more trend displays (for example, Trend_1
and Trend_2) with the respective analog axis and digital axis assigned with IO terminals.
²
Click the symbol in the Logic Editor toolbar to work with 2 open Trend display editor windows simul-
taneously.
² Drag and drop the assigned IO terminals from the Trend_1 display in the trend display to the Trend_2
node in the project tree.
IO terminals are successfully copied from the source trend display to the target trend display and displayed in
the Trend display editor.
² 17.1.4 Trend Display Editor
² 5.1.3 Function Chart
² 5.2.5 Deleting CFCs
² 5.2.3 Renaming a Function Chart (CFC)
² 5.2.2 Opening a CFC
² 5.2.4 Copying a CFC

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 89

, Edition 02.2022
Configuring CFC Trend View
6.10 Assigning IO Terminals of a CFC block to the Dynamic Display Editor

6.10 Assigning IO Terminals of a CFC block to the Dynamic Display

Editor
To assign IO terminals of a CFC block to a Dynamic display, proceed as follows:
² Open the 17.1.5 Dynamic Display Editor.
²
Click the symbol in the Logic Editor toolbar to view and work with the Trend display editor and with
the CFC chart editor simultaneously.
² Add a new CFC chart and instantiate the CFC blocks with the respective terminals.
² Connect compatible signals or settings to the CFC block IO terminals.
² Drag and drop the analog or digital IO terminals from the CFC block to the 17.1.5 Dynamic Display Editor.
IO terminals are successfully assigned and displayed in the 17.1.5 Dynamic Display Editor.

[sc_le_assigning_to_dynamic, 1, en_US]

NOTE

i You cannot monitor a signal element, but only the block input or output of an instruction.

NOTE

i You can add struct type IO terminals in the 17.1.5 Dynamic Display Editor only via the Properties tab. You
can also assign the IO terminals directly from the Properties tab of the Inspector window or the Control
Flow editor.

90 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
 Configuring CFC Trend View
6.11 Deleting CFC Block/CFC Chart after Assigning their Terminals to the Trend Display/Dynamic Display Editor

Related Topics
² 17.1.4 Trend Display Editor
² 5.1.3 Function Chart
² 5.2.5 Deleting CFCs
² 5.2.3 Renaming a Function Chart (CFC)
² 5.2.2 Opening a CFC
² 5.2.4 Copying a CFC
² 6.12 Watching Values in Trend/Dynamic Display while CFC Online Analysis (Monitoring) is in Progress

6.11 Deleting CFC Block/CFC Chart after Assigning their Terminals to the
Trend Display/Dynamic Display Editor
To confirm deletion of the CFC block or CFC chart after assigning their IO terminal to the trend display or
dynamic display, proceed as follows:
² Open the 17.1.4 Trend Display Editor or 17.1.5 Dynamic Display Editor assigned with IO terminals of CFC
blocks or charts.
² Right-click the CFC block or chart whose IO terminals are assigned to the trend display or the dynamic
display.
² Click Delete in the context menu.
The CFC block or the chart along with the assigned terminals in the 17.1.4 Trend Display Editor or
17.1.5 Dynamic Display Editor is deleted.

Related Topics
² 17.1.4 Trend Display Editor
² 5.1.3 Function Chart
² 5.2.5 Deleting CFCs
² 5.2.3 Renaming a Function Chart (CFC)
² 5.2.2 Opening a CFC
² 5.2.4 Copying a CFC

6.12 Watching Values in Trend/Dynamic Display while CFC Online

Analysis (Monitoring) is in Progress
To watch values in the Trend/Dynamic display while CFC online analysis is in progress, proceed as follows:
² In the project tree of an offline configuration, open a configured function chart (CFC).
² Create the trend display and/or dynamic display.
² Configure the trend display/dynamic display with the respective CFC block IO terminals.
² Load the configuration to the device.
² Start the online analysis of the Function Charts (CFC).
The values for the configured IO terminals are displayed in the 17.1.4 Trend Display Editor or in the
17.1.5 Dynamic Display Editor.

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 91

, Edition 02.2022
Configuring CFC Trend View
6.12 Watching Values in Trend/Dynamic Display while CFC Online Analysis (Monitoring) is in Progress

[sc_digsi_trenddisplayonline, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-1 Trend Display with CFC Online Analysis in Progress - Sample

[sc_le_watching_values_dynamicdisplay, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-2 Dynamic Display with CFC Online Analysis in Progress - Sample

Related Topics
² 17.1.4 Trend Display Editor
² 5.1.3 Function Chart
² 5.2.5 Deleting CFCs
² 5.2.3 Renaming a Function Chart (CFC)
² 5.2.2 Opening a CFC
² 5.2.4 Copying a CFC

92 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
 Configuring CFC Trend View
6.13 Watching Values in the Trend/Dynamic Display while CFC Offline Analysis is in Progress

6.13 Watching Values in the Trend/Dynamic Display while CFC Offline

Analysis is in Progress
To watch values in the Trend/Dynamic display while CFC offline analysis is in progress, proceed as follows:
² In the project tree of an offline configuration, open a configured function chart (CFC).
² Create the trend display and/or dynamic display.
² Configure the trend display/dynamic display with the respective CFC block IO terminals.
² Configure the test sequences.
² Start the offline analysis of the Function Charts (CFC).
The values for the configured IO terminals are displayed in the 17.1.4 Trend Display Editor or in the
17.1.5 Dynamic Display Editor.

Related Topics
² 17.1.4 Trend Display Editor
² 5.1.3 Function Chart
² 5.2.5 Deleting CFCs
² 5.2.3 Renaming a Function Chart (CFC)
² 5.2.2 Opening a CFC
² 5.2.4 Copying a CFC

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 93

, Edition 02.2022
7 Customizing Trend View Display

7.1 Overview of Customization 95

7.2 Renaming Axis in the Trend Display 95
7.3 Changing the Color of the Trend in the Trend View Display 95
7.4 Zooming Trend View Vertically and Horizontally 96
7.5 Deleting Trend Display from the Project Tree 96
7.6 Printing the Trend View Graph 96
7.7 Exporting the Trend View 97
7.8 Importing the Trend View 97

94 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
 Customizing Trend View Display
7.1 Overview of Customization

7.1 Overview of Customization

In the 17.1.4 Trend Display Editor , you can customize the parameters like axis position, axis mode, trend
color, value representation, select trend, and display mode, view and so on to have the desired graphical view.

7.2 Renaming Axis in the Trend Display

To rename the axis in the 17.1.4 Trend Display Editor , proceed as follows:
² Open the 17.1.4 Trend Display Editor with the configured trend display.
² Right-click the desired axis to be renamed.
² Select the option Rename in the context menu.
² Enter the desired name.

NOTE

i You cannot use the same name for different axes. You cannot rename the Tag name.

Related Topics
² 17.1.4 Trend Display Editor
² 5.1.3 Function Chart
² 5.2.5 Deleting CFCs
² 5.2.3 Renaming a Function Chart (CFC)
² 5.2.2 Opening a CFC
² 5.2.4 Copying a CFC

7.3 Changing the Color of the Trend in the Trend View Display
To change the color of the trend in the 17.1.4 Trend Display Editor , proceed as follows:
² Open the 17.1.4 Trend Display Editor with the configured trend display.
² Select the desired color in the Trend color column.
² Start the CFC online analysis
The trend graph appears with the selected color in the trend view display.

NOTE

i If you select the check box option under the Emphasis column for any trend, the trend graph gets high-
lighted in bold.

Related Topics
² 17.1.4 Trend Display Editor
² 5.1.3 Function Chart
² 5.2.5 Deleting CFCs
² 5.2.3 Renaming a Function Chart (CFC)
² 5.2.2 Opening a CFC

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 95

, Edition 02.2022
Customizing Trend View Display
7.4 Zooming Trend View Vertically and Horizontally

² 5.2.4 Copying a CFC

7.4 Zooming Trend View Vertically and Horizontally

To zoom in or zoom out the trend view display horizontally or vertically, proceed as follows:
² Open the 17.1.4 Trend Display Editor with a configured trend display.
² Select the Zoom in and/or Zoom out buttons.
The Trend view display is increased and/or decreased horizontally and vertically as per the clicks on the Zoom
in and Zoom out toolbar options.

Related Topics
² 17.1.4 Trend Display Editor
² 5.1.3 Function Chart
² 5.2.5 Deleting CFCs
² 5.2.3 Renaming a Function Chart (CFC)
² 5.2.2 Opening a CFC
² 5.2.4 Copying a CFC

7.5 Deleting Trend Display from the Project Tree

To delete the trend display from the project tree, proceed as follows:
² Select the already created trend display in the project tree.
² Right-click and select Delete from the context menu.
- or -
²
Click in the Logic Editor toolbar.

The Trend display is deleted.

Related Topics
² 17.1.4 Trend Display Editor
² 5.1.3 Function Chart
² 5.2.5 Deleting CFCs
² 5.2.3 Renaming a Function Chart (CFC)
² 5.2.2 Opening a CFC
² 5.2.4 Copying a CFC

7.6 Printing the Trend View Graph

To print the Trend view from the project tree, proceed as follows:
² Open the 17.1.4 Trend Display Editor with the configured trend display.
² Start the CFC online analysis.
Trend view display in the 17.1.4 Trend Display Editor starts monitoring of the configured CFC block terminals.
² Click the Print button in the trend view display.

96 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
 Customizing Trend View Display
7.7 Exporting the Trend View

The Print dialog opens.

² Click Print.
Print dialog opens again.
² Enter the printer details.

² Click OK.
The trend view graph is printed.

Related Topics
² 17.1.4 Trend Display Editor
² 5.1.3 Function Chart
² 5.2.5 Deleting CFCs
² 5.2.3 Renaming a Function Chart (CFC)
² 5.2.2 Opening a CFC
² 5.2.4 Copying a CFC

7.7 Exporting the Trend View

To export the trend view graph, proceed as follows:
² Open the 17.1.4 Trend Display Editor with a configured trend display.
² Start the CFC online analysis.
Trend view display in the 17.1.4 Trend Display Editor starts monitoring of the configured CFC block terminals.
² Select a trend from the Select trend list box.
The Export as csv file button is enabled.
² Click Export as csv file after the online analysis of CFC charts has finished.
The Trend view will be exported.

Related Topics
² 17.1.4 Trend Display Editor
² 5.1.3 Function Chart
² 5.2.5 Deleting CFCs
² 5.2.3 Renaming a Function Chart (CFC)
² 5.2.2 Opening a CFC
² 5.2.4 Copying a CFC

7.8 Importing the Trend View

To import the trend view graph, proceed as follows:
² Open the 17.1.4 Trend Display Editor .
² Click the Import csv file button in the trend view display.
The Open .csv file dialog opens.
² Select the desired file for import.
² Click Open.

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 97

, Edition 02.2022
Customizing Trend View Display
7.8 Importing the Trend View

The selected file is imported and displayed in the trend view display.

Related Topics
² 17.1.4 Trend Display Editor
² 5.1.3 Function Chart
² 5.2.5 Deleting CFCs
² 5.2.3 Renaming a Function Chart (CFC)
² 5.2.2 Opening a CFC
² 5.2.4 Copying a CFC

98 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
8 Configuring User-Defined Function Blocks

8.1 Brief Introduction to User-Defined Function Blocks 100

8.2 Adding a User-Defined Function Block 100
8.3 Opening a User-Defined Function Block 100
8.4 Defining the Interfaces of a User-Defined Function Block 101
8.5 Importing Inputs and Outputs in UFB Interfaces 103
8.6 Defining User-Defined Function Block Interfaces of STRUCT Type 106
8.7 Analyzing User-Defined Function Blocks 107
8.8 Modifying a User-Defined Function Block 108
8.9 Structured Text (ST) UFBs 109
8.10 Special Data Types in ST Code 111
8.11 ST Code – Supported Instruction Set acc. to IEC 61131-3 113
8.12 ST Code – Supported Notations with Examples 114
8.13 ST Code – Variables: Initialize, Retain, and Const 115
8.14 UFB Access Protection 115

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 99

, Edition 02.2022
Configuring User-Defined Function Blocks
8.1 Brief Introduction to User-Defined Function Blocks

8.1 Brief Introduction to User-Defined Function Blocks

The feature is intended to structure the CFC logic in a better way to reduce the complexity of the function
charts (CFC), and increase the modularity and reusability of the function chart. It allows you to configure and
use a user-defined function block (UFB) inside a CFC plan, or even in another user-defined function block.
A user-defined function block used inside another chart appears like a function block. User-defined function
blocks must have interfaces configured. These interfaces are the entry points to the user-defined function
blocks. A user-defined function block with interfaces can be added to another user-defined function chart. The
inputs and outputs of user-defined function blocks are connected to interfaces, whereas for a parent chart
they are connected to signals. Similar to function charts, user-defined function blocks can also be copied,
pasted, and deleted.
A user-defined function block will be executed if the parent function chart is executed within the parameter-
ized run sequence. After execution of a user-defined function block, the outputs are available via the output
interfaces. These outputs can be used for further processing in the parent chart.

NOTE

i User-defined function blocks must not use signals inside.

Related Topics
5.1.3 Function Chart
5.2.5 Deleting CFCs
5.2.3 Renaming a Function Chart (CFC)
5.2.2 Opening a CFC
5.2.4 Copying a CFC
17.1.2 Data Flow

8.2 Adding a User-Defined Function Block

There are several ways to add a user-defined function block into a function chart or into another user-defined
function block.
To add an existing user-defined function block, you can select an existing chart that has no signals or a user-
defined function block from the project tree and drag and drop it into the working area of another chart. An
instance of the user-defined function block is created in the chart.
The new subchart (for example, CFC_1_1) is created and displayed in the working area.

Related Topics
17.1.4 Trend Display Editor
5.1.3 Function Chart
5.2.5 Deleting CFCs
5.2.3 Renaming a Function Chart (CFC)
5.2.2 Opening a CFC
5.2.4 Copying a CFC

8.3 Opening a User-Defined Function Block

To open a user-defined function block, proceed as follows:
² Double-click the user-defined function block in the project tree.
- or -

100 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
 Configuring User-Defined Function Blocks
8.4 Defining the Interfaces of a User-Defined Function Block

² Right-click the user-defined function block in the Data flow view of the parent function chart and select
Open from the context menu.
The user-defined function block is displayed in the working area.

Related Topics
² 8.2 Adding a User-Defined Function Block
² 5.1.3 Function Chart
² 5.2.5 Deleting CFCs
² 5.2.3 Renaming a Function Chart (CFC)
² 5.2.2 Opening a CFC
² 5.2.4 Copying a CFC

8.4 Defining the Interfaces of a User-Defined Function Block

To define the interfaces of a user-defined function block, proceed as follows:
² In the Data Flow view of the user-defined function block, click the button above the toolbar to show the
Interface section.
² Right-click on the input field to add inputs to the user-defined function block, and define the desired type
and default value.
² Right-click on the Output field to add outputs of the user-defined function block, and define the desired
type and default value.
Description of the Interface sections:

• Name
The interface can be renamed if the name is selected. The interface names has to be unique for the
subchart. Therefore the name is expanded automatically by adding a number if the added or changed
name is already used. The name must not contain commas.

• Type
The data type of the interface can be defined here.

• Value
In column Value, you can set a default value for the interface. The default value is used if the interface is
not connected in the parent function chart. If the interface is already connected in the parent function
chart, the Value is shown as empty and you cannot set the Value.

• Comment
In the Comment field, you can add a comment to the subchart interface which may be helpful if the
subchart is used as a template. If you select the subchart in the parent chart, you can see the interface
Comment in the Interface tab of the Properties page. The interface Comment is also shown if you
select the terminal of the subchart in the parent chart in the General tab of the Properties page.

• Input
In the column Input the amount of input assignments of the current element is shown.

• Output
In the column Output the amount of output assignments of the current element is shown.

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 101

, Edition 02.2022
Configuring User-Defined Function Blocks
8.4 Defining the Interfaces of a User-Defined Function Block

[sc_le_defining_interface_io, 1, en_US]

Jump to Used Interface

As soon as an interface has been connected, you can use the context menu to jump to the locations where
this interface is connected.
² Right-click the desired interface.
² Select Used by... from the context menu.
² Select the target location from the list.

[sc_le_defining_interface_jump, 1, en_US]

Sorting
To sort the inputs and outputs of a UFB, use the Sort order column. Here you can enter a number which
defines the sort order. Default is the order in which the elements have been created.

[sc_ufb sort 1, 1, en_US]

Figure 8-1 Default Sort Order Numbers

² Enter sort order numbers as required.

² Click the Sort order column to start sorting.
The sorting is always ascending (for Inputs and Outputs).

102 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
 Configuring User-Defined Function Blocks
8.5 Importing Inputs and Outputs in UFB Interfaces

[sc_ufb sort 2, 1, en_US]

Figure 8-2 New Sorting According to Manually Entered Sort Order Numbers

Related Topics
² 17.1.2 Data Flow
² 8.2 Adding a User-Defined Function Block
² 5.1.3 Function Chart
² 5.2.5 Deleting CFCs
² 5.2.3 Renaming a Function Chart (CFC)
² 5.2.2 Opening a CFC
² 5.2.4 Copying a CFC

8.5 Importing Inputs and Outputs in UFB Interfaces

To facilitate the creation of large amounts of inputs and outputs, these can be imported via a file – provided
no inputs or outputs have been defined yet in the interface.
To import such a file, select Import interface... from the context menu, see Extended Context Menu,
Page 110.
The file can have one of the following formats:

• CSV

• JSON (can also be TXT)

In this file the required inputs and outputs are defined.
The following types are supported:
BOOL, DWORD, DINT, REAL, TIME, IEC60870DT, IEC104 signals (e.g. TI33), user-defined structures (structures
have to be defined under user-defined structures before).

NOTE

i If other datatypes are used, an error message occurs during compilation.

Examples
Here are examples for a CSV and a JSON file:

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 103

, Edition 02.2022
Configuring User-Defined Function Blocks
8.5 Importing Inputs and Outputs in UFB Interfaces

[sc_csv, 2, en_US]

Figure 8-3 CSV File

104 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
 Configuring User-Defined Function Blocks
8.5 Importing Inputs and Outputs in UFB Interfaces

[sc_json, 2, en_US]

Figure 8-4 JSON File

After importing the above file, the following inputs and outputs appear in the interface:

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 105

, Edition 02.2022
Configuring User-Defined Function Blocks
8.6 Defining User-Defined Function Block Interfaces of STRUCT Type

[sc_inouts, 1, en_US]

8.6 Defining User-Defined Function Block Interfaces of STRUCT Type

Block inputs or outputs of a structured type cannot be assigned to user-defined function block interfaces as
described in 8.4 Defining the Interfaces of a User-Defined Function Block. Structured interfaces have to be
configured manually.
To configure STRUCT-type interfaces, proceed as follows:
² In the Data Flow view of the user-defined function block, click the button above the toolbar to show the
Interface section.

² Right-click on the line input, add an interface input, and name your interface as you like.

106 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
 Configuring User-Defined Function Blocks
8.7 Analyzing User-Defined Function Blocks

² Select your user-defined structure as Type in drop-down menu. The defined variables in the user-defined
structure will be displayed below the structure.

NOTE

i The values of a user-defined structure can only be modified in the structure editor itself.

NOTE

i Changing the structure will automatically change the interfaces where the structure is used.

Related Topics
² 17.1.2 Data Flow
² 8.2 Adding a User-Defined Function Block
² 5.1.3 Function Chart
² 5.2.5 Deleting CFCs
² 5.2.3 Renaming a Function Chart (CFC)
² 5.2.2 Opening a CFC
² 5.2.4 Copying a CFC

8.7 Analyzing User-Defined Function Blocks

Function chart (CFC) analysis in Logic Editor allows you to verify the created CFC logic for the A8000 series
device. Using this feature you can watch the values available at respective inputs and/or outputs of the config-
ured CFC blocks. You can analyse CFC charts via Online Analysis.

NOTE

i The online analysis of user-defined function blocks is the same as the one described for Function Charts
(refer to 14.1 Analyzing Function Charts (CFC)).

Selecting a Specific Instance of a User-Defined Function Block for Analysis

Since for a user-defined function block only the values of 1 instance can be shown at a time, it is necessary to
select the relevant instance for monitoring. Chart window, dynamic view, and trend view will show values for
the selected instance. Only real-time values of 1 instance can be monitored at a time.

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 107

, Edition 02.2022
Configuring User-Defined Function Blocks
8.8 Modifying a User-Defined Function Block

² A specific instance of a user-defined function block can be opened for analysis directly from the CFC chart
where the block is inherited. To do so, right-click on the function block and select Open....

- or -
² Open the function-chart block via the project navigator tree and select the relevant instance from the list
box above the function-chart plan.

NOTE

i For selecting the specific instance of a user-defined function block, a connection to the device is necessary.

NOTE

i If a terminal which is used in a user-defined function block is added to a dynamic list, the value which is
displayed in the dynamic list depends on the currently selected instance of the user-defined function block.
If the selection changes, it is necessary to click the update data icon in the watch list in order to see the
values of the selected instance.

Related Topics
² 5.5.1 Displaying Interconnections

8.8 Modifying a User-Defined Function Block

Modifying the logic defined in a user-defined function block does not differ from modifying logic in a CFC
plan.

NOTE

i Each usage of a user-defined function block inside a chart will create an instance of the function block.

NOTE

i If changes are made in the user-defined function block, all used instances will be changed accordingly.

Related Topics
² 8.1 Brief Introduction to User-Defined Function Blocks
² 8.2 Adding a User-Defined Function Block

108 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
 Configuring User-Defined Function Blocks
8.9 Structured Text (ST) UFBs

8.9 Structured Text (ST) UFBs

[sc_st ufb ui, 1, en_US]

Figure 8-5 Reduced UI for ST UFBs

ST Code Editor
When you click in the ST code editor, you can zoom in and out by holding <Ctrl> and moving the mouse
wheel.
When you right-click in the ST code editor, a context menu appears providing the functions Copy, Paste, Cut,
Undo, Redo, and Select all.

NOTE

i If errors occur during compilation, an error message is displayed in the Inspector window, showing line and
position of each error.
You can jump to the corresponding position in the code by double-clicking the error message.

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 109

, Edition 02.2022
Configuring User-Defined Function Blocks
8.9 Structured Text (ST) UFBs

Extended Context Menu

[sc_st ufb context menu, 1, en_US]

Figure 8-6 Extended Context Menu

Import interface… is possible with both CFC and ST UFBs. The menu item is available if the interface is empty.
Import ST code… is only possible with ST UFBs (but dimmed for CFC UFBs). Multiple import is possible;
however, a new import overwrites the text in the ST code editor with the content of the imported file.

Grouping UFBs in Project Navigation Tree

In the Project Navigation Tree, you can define groups for user-defined function blocks, which is similar to
groups for CFCs.
This is useful for sorting and grouping your UFBs.

110 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
 Configuring User-Defined Function Blocks
8.10 Special Data Types in ST Code

[sc_ufb groups, 1, en_US]

Figure 8-7 Grouping UFBs

8.10 Special Data Types in ST Code

8.10.1 Data Type STRUCT as Interface Variable for ST UFB

You can create user-defined structures as interface variables (input and output) for an ST UFB.

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 111

, Edition 02.2022
Configuring User-Defined Function Blocks
8.10 Special Data Types in ST Code

[sc_le_struct_interface, 1, en_US]

NOTE

i Changing the structure will automatically change the interfaces where the structure is used.

8.10.2 Data Type STRUCT as Local Variable within an ST UFB

You can create structures as local variables within an ST UFB. Supported data types are BOOL, DWORD, DINT,
REAL, LREAL (only usable locally), TIME, and IEC60870DT.
Local variables of type STRUCT have to be declared in the VAR section, for example:
VAR
x, y : BOOL
a : STRUCT // supported (anonymous type)
b : STRUCT
c : REAL
END_STRUCT;
d : DINT;
END_STRUCT;
k : Struct_1; // not supported
l : TI30; // not supported
END_VAR;

112 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
 Configuring User-Defined Function Blocks
8.11 ST Code – Supported Instruction Set acc. to IEC 61131-3

y := IN.Simple; // supported
x := IN.Signal.Value; // supported

8.10.3 Data Type ARRAY as Local Variable within an ST UFB

You can create arrays as local variables within an ST UFB.

Supported data types are BOOL, DWORD, DINT, REAL, LREAL (only usable locally), TIME, and IEC60870DT.

8.10.4 Data Type LREAL as Local Variable within an ST UFB

You can create local variables of type LREAL within an ST UFB in order to execute calculations requiring higher
precision.
Using this value outside of the ST UFB is only possible with an interface variable of type REAL. In this case you
have to pay attention to the value ranges of the data types used.

8.11 ST Code – Supported Instruction Set acc. to IEC 61131-3

Detailed information for following chapters:

6.6.2.5.2 – Table 22 – Data Type Conversion Functions

TO_BOOL, TO_DWORD, TO_DINT, TO_TIME, TO_REAL, TO_LREAL supported according to No. 1b.

6.6.2.5.8 – Table 28 – Numerical and Arithmetic Functions

Exceptions
No. 12 ATAN2(y, x)

6.6.2.5.8 – Table 29 – Arithmetic Functions

Exceptions
No. 7 MOVE(IN)
use assignment ":=" instead

6.6.2.5.9 – Table 30 – Bit Shift Functions

6.6.2.5.9 – Table 31 – Bitwise Boolean Functions

Additionally supported: NAND(IN1...IN10), NOR(IN1...IN10)

6.6.2.5.10 – Table 32 – Selection Functions

Exceptions
No. 1 MOVE(IN)
use assignment ":=" instead

6.6.2.5.10 – Table 33 – Comparison Functions

6.6.3.5.2 – Table 43 – Standard Bistable Function Blocks

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 113

, Edition 02.2022
Configuring User-Defined Function Blocks
8.12 ST Code – Supported Notations with Examples

6.6.3.5.3 – Table 44 – Standard Edge Detection Function Blocks

6.6.3.5.4 – Table 45 – Standard Counter Function Blocks

6.6.3.5.5 – Table 46 – Standard Timer Function Blocks

Additionally Supported
Blink

Other

Explanation Name Corresponding Catalog Block

split Date-Time SPLIT_IEC60870DT SPLIT_IEC60870DT
merge Date-Time MERGE_IEC60870DT MERGE_IEC60870DT

7.3.2 – Table 71 – Operators of the ST Language

Exceptions
No. 2 Supported for standard functions
No. 3 Dereference

7.3.3.1 – Table 72 – ST Language Statements

Exceptions
No. 1b Variables and expression of different elementary data types with implicit type
conversion according Figure 11
No. 1c Variable and expression of user-defined type
No. 1d Instances of function block type
No. 2a Function call – supported for standard functions
No. 2b Function block call and FB output usage – supported for standard functions
No. 2c Method call
No. 3 RETURN

Supported with Exceptions

No. 5 CASE Range, e.g. 4, 6 to 10

8.12 ST Code – Supported Notations with Examples

Function Block Calls
Notation 1
The input variables are given by formal names. Variables do not need to be complete. The output variables are
accessed separately after the call. This is according to IEC 61131-3, table 42, no. 2 and 7.
Example
TON_1(IN := Eingang, PT := Zeit);
Ausgang := TON_1.Q;

Notation 4

114 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
 Configuring User-Defined Function Blocks
8.13 ST Code – Variables: Initialize, Retain, and Const

The input variables are assigned separately and are accessed by formal names, similar to the access to struc-
ture members. The output variables are accessed separately after the call. This is according to IEC 61131-3,
table 42, no. 6a and 7.
Example
TON_1.IN := Eingang;
TON_1.PT := Zeit;
TON_1();
Ausgang := TON_1.Q;

Function Calls
Notation 1
The input variables are given by formal names. Variables do not need to be complete. Variables not given in
the call will get the default value. This is according to IEC 61131-3, table 20, no. 1b.
Example
A := LIMIT(IN := B, MX := 5);

Notation 2
The input variables are given by position/order. Variables need to be complete. This is according to IEC
61131-3, table 20, no. 2.
Example
A := LIMIT(B, 0, 5);

8.13 ST Code – Variables: Initialize, Retain, and Const

Var1 = local variable of type BOOL
Var2 = local variable of type BOOL with initialization
Var3 = local retain variable of type BOOL
Var4 = local retain variable of type BOOL with initialization
Con1 = local constant of type BOOL with initialization

VAR
Var1 : BOOL;
Var2 : BOOL := TRUE;
END_VAR

VAR RETAIN
Var3 : BOOL;
Var4 : BOOL := TRUE;
END_VAR

VAR CONSTANT
Con1 : BOOL := FALSE;
END_VAR

8.14 UFB Access Protection

To protect a UFB from unintentional editing, you can password the UFB.
The password is only used to protect against unintentional editing of the UFB. It is not intended to increase
access security.

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 115

, Edition 02.2022
Configuring User-Defined Function Blocks
8.14 UFB Access Protection

The password provides

• no protection against unauthorized access to know-how in UFBs,

• no security-relevant authorization to access UFBs.

Setting the Access Protection

The access protection is set via the Access protection... command in the context menu of the UFB.

[sc_ufb_accessprot_en, 1, en_US]

A protected UFB is displayed with a small lock in the 1.1.2 Project Tree:

Related Topics
5.9 CFC-Plan Access Protection
8.1 Brief Introduction to User-Defined Function Blocks

116 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
9 Data Types and Data Structures

9.1 Basic Data Types 118

9.2 Structure Data Types According to IEC 60870-5-104 119
9.3 Generic Data Types 119
9.4 User-Defined Structures 119
9.5 User-Defined Libraries 120

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 117

, Edition 02.2022
Data Types and Data Structures
9.1 Basic Data Types

9.1 Basic Data Types

CFC uses the following basic data types:
Data Type Number of Explanation
Bits
BOOL 1 2 states: TRUE or FALSE
DINT 32 Signed number
Value range from -2 147 483 648 to +2 147 483 647
Format Example of Representation in a CFC chart
entry
Decimal 12345 12345
-17385267 -17385267
10#12345678 112345678
Hexadecimal 16#3BC9 15305
Binary 2#1011010101 46421
010101
REAL 32 Floating-point number
Value range:
-3.402823e+38 to -1.175495e-38
±0
+1.175495e-38 to +3.402823e+38
Format Example of Representation in a CFC chart
entry
Floating-point 22.78 22.78
number acc. to 1.23452e6 1234520.0
IEEE754 standard -3.456e-3 -0.003456
2.573e+19 2.573e+19
TIME 32 Time-string
Value range:
-2147483647 ms to 2147483647 ms
-24d_20h_31m_23s_647ms to 24d_20h_31m_23s_647ms
Example of entry Representation in a CFC chart
Any to DInt:
2d_21h_31m_4s_456 250264456
Any to Time:
543234567 6d_6h_53m_54s_567ms
54323456 15h_5m_23_s_456ms
-1 -1ms
1 1ms
IEC60870DT 56 IEC60870DT DateTime
DWORD 32 Format Example of entry
Hexadecimal 16#AFFEAFFE

NOTE

i There might be signals used in SICAM Device Manager with a specific Type Identification (TI) with a value
range that does not match the supported data types in Logic Editor.
This has to be considered when implementing and testing the CFC logic.

118 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
 Data Types and Data Structures
9.2 Structure Data Types According to IEC 60870-5-104

Related Topics
9 Data Types and Data Structures

9.2 Structure Data Types According to IEC 60870-5-104

The SICAM Device Manager handles Type Identifiers (TIs) of the IEC 60870-5-104 standard. In particular the
followig are supported:
TI30, TI31, TI32, TI33, TI34, TI35, TI36, TI37, TI38, TI39, TI40, TI45, TI46, TI47, TI48, TI49, TI50, TI51
In Logic Editor, the according information elements are provided as pre-defined structures and can be used in
user-defined function blocks after compiling the device.
These data types are only available for CP-8050 and can be used in UFB interfaces and as structure elements.

Related Topics
9 Data Types and Data Structures

9.3 Generic Data Types

CFC uses the following generic data types:
Data Type Explanation
ANY_TYPE All basic data types
ANY_MAGNITUDE DINT, REAL (in ST Code additionally LREAL), TIME
ANY_NUM DINT, REAL (in ST Code additionally LREAL)
ANY_REAL REAL
ANY_INT DINT
ANY_BIT BOOL, DWORD
ANY_ELEMENTARY BOOL, DWORD, DINT, REAL (in ST Code additionally LREAL), TIME

Related Topics
9 Data Types and Data Structures

9.4 User-Defined Structures

With the user-defined structure editor you can define your own structures using the known basic types.

Creating a User-Defined Structure

² In the Project Navigation Tree, click Add new structure.
- or -
² In the User-Defined Structure editor, click a new row.
² Select the desired datatype, the default value.
² If required, enable/disable the Const and Retain options.
² You can enter a comment for the added variable.

Modifing a User-Defined Structure

² You can delete an added variable by right-clicking in a cell of the variable and selecting Delete in the
context menu.

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 119

, Edition 02.2022
Data Types and Data Structures
9.5 User-Defined Libraries

- or -
² You can modify variables in an easy manner by editing the variable content in the editor.

Deleting a User-Defined Structure

² In the Project Navigation Tree, select Delete.

NOTE

i A message box opens to inform you that also the connections used in plans will be deleted.

Related Topics
² 9.1 Basic Data Types

9.5 User-Defined Libraries

Overview
You can build your own user-defined libraries to store frequently used items in the Global libraries, including
user-defined function blocks (see 8 Configuring User-Defined Function Blocks) and user-defined structures
(see 9.4 User-Defined Structures). These libraries can be stored, archived (also in compressed form) , and
loaded (also read-only, for example, to avoid corruption by other users).
The user-defined libraries can be saved anywhere in the file system (also on portable storages like USB sticks).
This is useful for exchanging libraries between different projects on different systems and locations.

NOTE

i Since user-defined libraries are not stored in the Device Manager, but on any storage device, you have to
take care about them yourself.

Handling User-Defined Libraries

[sc_le_udlib, 1, en_US]

Figure 9-1 Exchanging UFBs and Structures between Project Navigation Tree and Global Library

120 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
 Data Types and Data Structures
9.5 User-Defined Libraries

The handling of the user-defined libraries is quite sophisticated, in order to support you best.

• For a more clearly arranged library structure, you can create folders.

• You can store user-defined function blocks and user-defined structures from the project tree to the
library, for example via drag and drop.

NOTE

i If a user-defined function block or structure contains dependencies, i.e. references further user-defined
function blocks or structures, these dependent items are also stored in the library within the same folder
level.

NOTE

i If a chain of user-defined function blocks/structures is stored to the library and some of the blocks/struc-
tures already exist, these existing items will be updated. The not yet existing items will be stored as new
entries.

• You can copy user-defined function blocks/structures from a loaded library into the project tree, for
example via drag and drop.

NOTE

i If a user-defined function block or structure contains dependencies, i.e. references further user-defined
function blocks or structures, these dependent items are also stored in the project navigation tree and are
distributed into the corresponding project-tree folders.

NOTE

i If a chain of user-defined function blocks/structures is stored to the project navigation tree and some of the
user-defined function blocks/structures already exist, these existing items will be updated. The not yet
existing items will be stored as new entries.

NOTE

i Already existing or equally named user-defined function blocks and structures are not identified via name,
but via internal ID (see Properties in the Inspector window).

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 121

, Edition 02.2022
10 Instructions (Blocks)

10.1 Logic 123

10.2 Arithmetic 132
10.3 Compare 135
10.4 Timer and Counter 141
10.5 Flip-Flops 148
10.6 Edge Detection 149
10.7 Selection 150
10.8 Power and Exponent 156
10.9 Trigonometry 158
10.10 Conversion 161
10.11 Extended 164
10.12 Target System 169

122 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
 Instructions (Blocks)
10.1 Logic

10.1 Logic

10.1.1 BOOL

10.1.1.1 OR
The OR block links binary input values via the logical OR function.

Connections and Explanations

You can find explanations for the connections of the block in the following table:
Name Data Type Explanation Default
Inputs IN1 BOOL Input value 1 0
IN2 BOOL Input value 2 0
IN3 to BOOL Input value 3 to input value 0
IN10 10
Output OUT BOOL Input values combined with
the logical OR function

Once the block has been inserted into the chart, only 2 of the 10 inputs are visible. If you need more inputs,
uncheck the relevant boxes in the Hidden column in the block properties.

NOTE

i Inputs that are not used must be assigned a default value of 0.

Detailed Description
The block connects the values at the inputs IN1 to IN10 with the logical OR function. The block then displays a
1 at the OUT output only if the value of at least one input is 1. Only if the values of all inputs are 0 then also
the OUT output is 0.
Input IN1 Input IN2 Output OUT
0 0 0
0 1 1
1 0 1
1 1 1

Related Topics
5.1.4 Block
5.5.9 Setting Parameters for Block Connections

10.1.1.2 XOR
The XOR block links binary input values via the logical XOR function.

Connections and Explanations

You can find explanations for the connections of the block in the following table:
Name Data Type Explanation Default
Inputs IN1 BOOL Input value 1 1
IN2 BOOL Input value 2 1
Output OUT BOOL Output value

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 123

, Edition 02.2022
Instructions (Blocks)
10.1 Logic

Detailed Description
The block connects the values at the inputs IN1 and IN2 with the logical XOR function. The block then displays
a 1 at the OUT output only if just 1 input has an input value of 1. Otherwise, the OUT output is 0.

Value Table

Input IN1 Input IN2 Output OUT

0 0 0
0 1 1
1 0 1
1 1 0

Related Topics
5.1.4 Block
5.5.9 Setting Parameters for Block Connections

10.1.1.3 NOR
The NOR block links binary input values via the logical NOR function.

Connections and Explanations

You can find explanations for the connections of the block in the following table:
Name Data Type Explanation Default
Inputs IN1 BOOL Input value 1 1
IN2 BOOL Input value 2 1
IN3 to BOOL Input value 3 to input value 1
IN10 10
Output OUT BOOL Input values combined with
the logical OR function

Once the block has been inserted into the chart, only 2 of the 10 inputs are visible. If you need more inputs,
uncheck the relevant boxes in the Hidden column in the block properties.

NOTE

i Inputs that are not used must be assigned a default value of 0.

Detailed Description
The block connects the values at the inputs IN1 to IN10 with the logical OR function. The block then displays a
1 at the OUT output only if the values of all inputs are 0.
Input IN1 Input IN2 Output OUT
0 0 1
0 1 0
1 0 0
1 1 0

Related Topics
5.1.4 Block
5.5.9 Setting Parameters for Block Connections

124 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
 Instructions (Blocks)
10.1 Logic

10.1.1.4 AND
The AND block links binary input values via the logical AND function.

Connections and Explanations

You can find explanations for the connections of the block in the following table:
Name Data Type Explanation Default
Inputs IN1 BOOL Input value 1 1
IN2 BOOL Input value 2 1
IN3 to IN10 BOOL Input value 3 to input value 10 1
Output OUT BOOL Input values combined with the logical AND function

Once the block has been inserted into the chart, only 2 of the 10 inputs are visible. If you need more inputs,
uncheck the relevant boxes in the Hidden column in the block properties.

NOTE

i Inputs that are not used must be assigned a default value of 1.

Detailed Description
The block connects the values at the inputs IN1 to IN10 with the logical AND function. The block then displays
a 1 at the OUT output only if the input values of all inputs are 1. Otherwise, the OUT output is 0.

Value Table

Input IN1 Input IN2 Output OUT

0 0 0
0 1 0
1 0 0
1 1 1

Related Topics
5.1.4 Block
5.5.9 Setting Parameters for Block Connections

10.1.1.5 NAND
The NAND block links binary input values via the logical NAND function.

Connections and Explanations

You can find explanations for the connections of the block in the following table:
Name Data Type Explanation Default
Inputs IN1 BOOL Input value 1 1
IN2 BOOL Input value 2 1
IN3 to IN10 BOOL Input value 3 to input value 10 1
Output OUT BOOL Input values combined with the logical NAND func-
tion

Once the block has been inserted into the chart, only 2 of the 10 inputs are visible. If you need more inputs,
uncheck the relevant boxes in the Hidden column in the block properties.

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 125

, Edition 02.2022
Instructions (Blocks)
10.1 Logic

NOTE

i Inputs that are not used must be assigned a default value of 0.

Detailed Description
The block connects the values at the inputs IN1 to IN10 with the logical NAND function and displays the
output value OUT as 1 only if at least one of the input values is 0. Otherwise, the OUT output value is 0.

Value Table

Input IN1 Input IN2 Output OUT

0 0 1
0 1 1
1 0 1
1 1 0

Related Topics
5.1.4 Block
5.5.9 Setting Parameters for Block Connections

10.1.1.6 NOT
The NOT block (formerly NEG) inverts the binary input value with the logical NOT function.

Connections and Explanations

You can find explanations for the connections of the block in the following table:
Name Data Type Explanation Default
Input IN BOOL Input value 1
Output OUT BOOL Negated input value

Value Table

Input IN Output OUT

0 1
1 0

Related Topics
5.1.4 Block
5.5.9 Setting Parameters for Block Connections

10.1.2 WORD

10.1.2.1 AND_DW
The AND_DW block links the 2 32-bit input values bit by bit using the logical AND function.

Connections and Explanations

You can find explanations for the connections of the block in the following table:

126 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
 Instructions (Blocks)
10.1 Logic

Name Data Type Explanation Default

Inputs IN1 DWORD Input value 1 16#FFFFFFFF
IN2 DWORD Input value 2 16#FFFFFFFF
Output OUT DWORD Input values bitwise combined with the logical AND
function

Detailed Description
The block performs the logical AND function for the 2 input bit patterns IN1 and IN2 for each pair of corre-
sponding bits. The block supplies the result as a bit pattern at the OUT output.

Related Topics
5.1.4 Block
5.5.9 Setting Parameters for Block Connections
10.1.1.4 AND

10.1.2.2 NAND_DW
The NAND_DW block links the 2 32-bit input values bit by bit using the logical NAND function.

Connections and Explanations

You can find explanations for the connections of the block in the following table:
Name Data Type Explanation Default
Inputs IN1 DWORD Input value 1 16#FFFFFFFF
IN2 DWORD Input value 2 16#FFFFFFFF
Output OUT DWORD Input values bitwise combined with the logical NAND
function

Detailed Description
The block performs the logical NAND function for the 2 input bit patterns IN1 and IN2 for each pair of corre-
sponding bits. The block supplies the result as a bit pattern at the OUT output.

Related Topics
5.1.4 Block
5.5.9 Setting Parameters for Block Connections
10.1.1.5 NAND

10.1.2.3 OR_DW
The OR_DW block links the 2 32-bit input values bit by bit using the logical OR function.

Connections and Explanations

You can find explanations for the connections of the block in the following table:
Name Data Type Explanation Default
Inputs IN1 DWORD Input value 1 0
IN2 DWORD Input value 2 0
Output OUT DWORD Input values bitwise
combined with the logical
OR function

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 127

, Edition 02.2022
Instructions (Blocks)
10.1 Logic

Detailed Description
The block performs the logical OR function for the 2 input bit patterns IN1 and IN2 for each pair of corre-
sponding bits. The block supplies the result as a bit pattern at the OUT output.

Related Topics
5.1.4 Block
5.5.9 Setting Parameters for Block Connections
10.1.1.1 OR

10.1.2.4 XOR_DW
The XOR_DW block links the 2 32-bit input values bit by bit using the logical XOR function.

Connections and Explanations

You can find explanations for the connections of the block in the following table:
Name Data Type Explanation Default
Inputs IN1 DWORD Input value 1 16#FFFFFFFF
IN2 DWORD Input value 2 16#FFFFFFFF
Output OUT DWORD Input values bitwise combined with the logical XOR
function

Detailed Description
The block performs the logical XOR function for the 2 input bit patterns IN1 and IN2 for each pair of corre-
sponding bits. The block supplies the result as a bit pattern at the OUT output.

Related Topics
5.1.4 Block
5.5.9 Setting Parameters for Block Connections
10.1.1.2 XOR

10.1.2.5 NOR_DW
The NOR_DW block links the 2 32-bit input values bit by bit using the logical NOR function.

Connections and Explanations

You can find explanations for the connections of the block in the following table:
Name Data Type Explanation Default
Inputs IN1 DWORD Input value 1 0
IN2 DWORD Input value 2 0
Output OUT DWORD Input values combined with
the logical NOR function

Detailed Description
The block performs the logical NOR function for the 2 input bit patterns IN1 and IN2 for each pair of corre-
sponding bits. The block supplies the result as a bit pattern at the OUT output.

Related Topics
5.1.4 Block
5.5.9 Setting Parameters for Block Connections
10.1.1.3 NOR

128 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
 Instructions (Blocks)
10.1 Logic

10.1.2.6 NOT_DW
The NOT_DW block inverts the 32-bit input value using the logical NOT function.

Connections and Explanations

You can find explanations for the connections of the block in the following table:
Name Data Type Explanation Default
Input IN DWORD Input value 16#FFFFFFFF
Output OUT DWORD Negated input value

Related Topics
5.1.4 Block
5.5.9 Setting Parameters for Block Connections
10.1.1.6 NOT

10.1.2.7 SHL_DW
The SHL_DW block shifts the bits of the 32-bit input value IN (DWORD) to the left by the number of bit posi-
tions specified by input N (DINT).

Connections and Explanations

You can find explanations for the connections of the block in the following table:
Name Data Type Explanation Default
Input IN DWORD Input value 0
N DINT Number of bit positions to be shifted 1
Output OUT DWORD Input value shifted to the left by N bit positions

Detailed Description
The block shifts the bits of the input value IN to the left. The input N indicates how many bit positions are
shifted. This shift is equivalent to multiplying by 2n. Empty bit positions resulting from the shift are filled with
0.
The block supplies the result as a 32-bit pattern at the OUT output.

Related Topics
5.1.4 Block
5.5.9 Setting Parameters for Block Connections

10.1.2.8 SHR_DW
The SHR_DW block shifts the bits of the 32-bit input value IN (DWORD) to the right by the number of bit posi-
tions specified by input N (DINT).

Connections and Explanations

You can find explanations for the connections of the block in the following table:
Name Data Type Explanation Default
Input IN DWORD Input value 0
N DINT Number of bit positions to be shifted 1
Output OUT DWORD Input value shifted to the right by N bit positions

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 129

, Edition 02.2022
Instructions (Blocks)
10.1 Logic

Detailed Description
The block shifts the bits of the input value IN to the right. The input N indicates how many bit positions are
shifted. This shift is equivalent to dividing by 2n. Empty bit positions resulting from the shift are filled with 0.
The block supplies the result as a 32-bit pattern at the OUT output.

Related Topics
5.1.4 Block
5.5.9 Setting Parameters for Block Connections

10.1.2.9 ROL_DW
The ROL_DW block rotates the bits of the 32-bit input value IN (DWORD) to the left by the number of bit posi-
tions specified by input N (DINT).

Connections and Explanations

You can find explanations for the connections of the block in the following table:
Name Data Type Explanation Default
Input IN DWORD Input value 0
N DINT Number of bit positions to be rotated 1
Output OUT DWORD Input value rotated to the left by N bit positions

Detailed Description
The block rotates the bits of the input value IN to the left. The input N indicates how many bit positions are
rotated.
The block supplies the result as a 32-bit pattern at the OUT output.

Related Topics
5.1.4 Block
5.5.9 Setting Parameters for Block Connections

10.1.2.10 ROR_DW
The ROR_DW block rotates the bits of the 32-bit input value IN (DWORD) to the right by the number of bit
positions specified by input N (DINT).

Connections and Explanations

You can find explanations for the connections of the block in the following table:
Name Data Type Explanation Default
Input IN DWORD Input value 0
N DINT Number of bit positions to be shifted 1
Output OUT DWORD Input value rotated to the right by N bit positions

Detailed Description
The block rotates the bits of the input value IN to the right. The input N indicates how many bit positions are
rotated.
The block supplies the result as a 32-bit pattern at the OUT output.

Related Topics
5.1.4 Block
5.5.9 Setting Parameters for Block Connections

130 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
 Instructions (Blocks)
10.1 Logic

10.1.2.11 MERGE_DW
The MERGE_DW block combines up to 32 Boolean input values into 1 32-bit pattern (DWORD).

Connections and Explanations

You can find explanations for the connections of the block in the following table:
Name Data Type Explanation Default
Input BIT_00 BOOL Binary input value, becomes the least significant bit 0
of the output value
BIT_01 BOOL Binary input value 0
BIT_02 to BOOL Binary input values 0
BIT_30
BIT_31 BOOL Binary input value, becomes the most significant bit 0
of the output value
Output OUT DWORD Output value combined from input values

Detailed Description
The block combines up to 32 Boolean input values to form a 32-bit pattern (DWORD). The 1st Boolean input
value becomes the least significant bit of the output value. Unassigned input values are set to 0 by default.
The block supplies the result as a 32-bit pattern at the OUT output.

Related Topics
5.1.4 Block
5.5.9 Setting Parameters for Block Connections

10.1.2.12 SPLIT_DW
The SPLIT_DW block splits a 32-bit pattern (DWORD) into 32 individual Boolean output values.

Connections and Explanations

You can find explanations for the connections of the block in the following table:
Name Data Type Explanation Default
Input IN DWORD Input value 0
Output BIT_00 BOOL Binary output value, the least significant bit of the
input value
BIT_01 BOOL Binary output value
BIT_02 to BOOL Binary output values
BIT_30
BIT_31 BOOL Binary output value, the most significant bit of the
input value

Detailed Description
The block splits a 32-bit pattern into 32 individual Boolean output values. The least significant bit of the input
value becomes the 1st Boolean output value.

Related Topics
5.1.4 Block
5.5.9 Setting Parameters for Block Connections

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 131

, Edition 02.2022
Instructions (Blocks)
10.2 Arithmetic

10.2 Arithmetic

10.2.1 ABS

The ABS block calculates the absolute value of an input value of type ANY_NUM.

Connections and Explanations

You can find explanations for the connections of the block in the following table:
Name Data Type Explanation Default
Input IN ANY_NUM Input value 0
Output OUT ANY_NUM, depending Result of function
on basic data type of abs(IN)
input

Detailed Description
The block calculates the absolute value of the value at the IN input. The result of the function is available at
the OUT output.
The instruction uses the basic data type which is assigned to the input also for the output (e.g., Input = DINT
→ Output = DINT).

Related Topics
5.1.4 Block
5.5.9 Setting Parameters for Block Connections
9.3 Generic Data Types

10.2.2 ADD

The ADD block adds up to 10 input values of data type ANY_MAGNITUDE.

Connections and Explanations

You can find explanations for the connections of the block in the following table:
Name Data Type Explanation Default
Inputs IN1 ANY_MAGNITUDE Summand 1 0
IN2 ANY_MAGNITUDE Summand 2 0
IN3 ANY_MAGNITUDE Summand 3 0
IN4 ANY_MAGNITUDE Summand 4 0
IN5 ANY_MAGNITUDE Summand 5 0
IN6 ANY_MAGNITUDE Summand 6 0
IN7 ANY_MAGNITUDE Summand 7 0
IN8 ANY_MAGNITUDE Summand 8 0
IN9 ANY_MAGNITUDE Summand 9 0
IN10 ANY_MAGNITUDE Summand 10 0
Output OUT ANY_MAGNITUDE, Result of function
depending on basic OUT = IN1 + IN2 + IN3 + IN4 + IN5 + IN6
data type of input + IN7 + IN8 + IN9 + IN10

Once the block has been inserted into the chart, only 2 of the 10 inputs are visible. If you need more inputs,
uncheck the relevant boxes in the Hidden column in the block properties.

132 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
 Instructions (Blocks)
10.2 Arithmetic

Detailed Description
The block adds the values at the inputs IN1 to IN10. The result of the addition is available at the OUT output.
The instruction uses the basic data type which is assigned to IN1 also for the calculation (i.e., inputs IN2 to
IN10 have to use the same basic data type like IN1) and for the output (e.g., Input = DINT → Output = DINT).

Related Topics
5.1.4 Block
5.5.9 Setting Parameters for Block Connections
9.3 Generic Data Types

10.2.3 DIV

The DIV block divides an input value of data type ANY_NUM (numerator) by a 2nd input value (denominator)
of the same basic data type.

Connections and Explanations

You can find explanations for the connections of the block in the following table:
Name Data Type Explanation Default
Inputs IN ANY_NUM Numerator 0
INDIV ANY_NUM Denominator 1
Output OUT ANY_NUM, Result of function OUT = IN / INDIV
depending
on basic
data type of
input

Detailed Description
The block divides the value at the IN input (numerator) by the value at the INDIV input (denominator). The
result of the division is available at the OUT output.
The instruction uses the basic data type which is assigned to IN also for the calculation (i.e., INDIV has to use
the same basic data type like IN) and for the output (e.g., Input = DINT → Output = DINT).

Related Topics
5.1.4 Block
5.5.9 Setting Parameters for Block Connections
9.3 Generic Data Types

10.2.4 MOD

The MOD block calculates the modulo from 2 input value of data type ANY_INT. Modulo is a remainder opera-
tion which generates the whole-number remainder from a whole-number division. For example, with 10
modulo 3 the remainder is 1.

Connections and Explanations

You can find explanations for the connections of the block in the following table:

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 133

, Edition 02.2022
Instructions (Blocks)
10.2 Arithmetic

Name Data Type Explanation Default

Inputs IN ANY_INT Numerator 0
IND ANY_INT Denominator 1
Output OUT ANY_INT, Result of function OUT = IN mod IND
depending
on basic
data type of
input

Detailed Description
The block divides the value at the IN input (numerator) by the value at the IND input (denominator) and
outputs the remainder of the division. The result of the modulo function is available at the OUT output. You
can use the modulo function to check, for example whether a number is even. If x mod 2 = 0, then x is even.
The instruction uses the basic data type which is assigned to IN also for the calculation (i.e., IND has to use the
same basic data type like IN) and for the output (e.g., Input = DINT → Output = DINT).

Related Topics
5.1.4 Block
5.5.9 Setting Parameters for Block Connections
9.3 Generic Data Types

10.2.5 MUL

The MUL block multiplies up to 10 input values of data type ANY_NUM (factors).

Connections and Explanations

You can find explanations for the connections of the block in the following table:
Name Data Type Explanation Default
Inputs IN1 ANY_NUM Factor 1 0
IN2 ANY_NUM Factor 2 0
IN3 ANY_NUM Factor 3 0
IN4 ANY_NUM Factor 4 0
IN5 ANY_NUM Factor 5 0
IN6 ANY_NUM Factor 6 0
IN7 ANY_NUM Factor 7 0
IN8 ANY_NUM Factor 8 0
IN9 ANY_NUM Factor 9 0
IN10 ANY_NUM Factor 10 0
Output OUT ANY_NUM, Result of function OUT = IN1 × IN2 × IN3 × IN4 ×
depending IN5 × IN6 × IN7 × IN8 × IN9 × IN10
on basic
data type of
input

Once the block has been inserted into the chart, only 2 of the 10 inputs are visible. If you need more inputs,
add inputs in the general tab in the block properties.

Detailed Description
The block multiplies the values at the inputs IN1 to IN10. The result of the multiplication is available at the
OUT output.
If the value is exceeded in either direction, the value of the output stops at the maximum or minimum value.

134 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
 Instructions (Blocks)
10.3 Compare

The instruction uses the basic data type which is assigned to IN1 also for the calculation (i.e., inputs IN2 to
IN10 have to use the same basic data type like IN1) and for the output (e.g., Input = DINT → Output = DINT).

Related Topics
5.1.4 Block
5.5.9 Setting Parameters for Block Connections
9.3 Generic Data Types

10.2.6 SUB

The SUB block subtracts an input value of data type ANY_MAGNITUDE (subtrahend) from a 2nd input value of
data type ANY_MAGNITUDE (minuend).

Connections and Explanations

You can find explanations for the connections of the block in the following table:
Name Data Type Explanation Default
Inputs IN ANY_MAGNITUDE Minuend 0
INSUB ANY_MAGNITUDE Subtrahend 1
Output OUT ANY_MAGNITUDE, Result of function OUT = IN - INSUB
depending on basic
data type of input

Detailed Description
The block subtracts the value at the INSUB input from the value at the IN input. The result of the subtraction is
available at the OUT output.
If the value is exceeded in either direction, the value of the output stops at the maximum or minimum value.
The instruction uses the basic data type which is assigned to IN also for the calculation (i.e., input INSUB has
to use the same basic data type like IN) and for the output (e.g., Input = DINT → Output = DINT).

Related Topics
5.1.4 Block
5.5.9 Setting Parameters for Block Connections
9.3 Generic Data Types

10.3 Compare

10.3.1 LT

The LT block compares 2 input values of data type ANY_NUM. If input value 1 is less than input value 2, the
block sets the output to 1.

Connections and Explanations

You can find explanations for the connections of the block in the following table:
Name Data Type Explanation Default
Inputs IN1 ANY_NUM Input value 1 0
IN2 ANY_NUM Input value 2 0
Outputs OUT BOOL 1: IN1 < IN2
0: IN1 >= IN2

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 135

, Edition 02.2022
Instructions (Blocks)
10.3 Compare

Detailed Description
The block compares the value at the IN1 input with the value at the IN2 input. If the value at the IN1 input is
less than the value at the IN2 input, the block sets the OUT output to 1.
The following table shows how the block processes special values. These special values include values with a
positive or negative overflow, as well as invalid values. An example is used to illustrate how to read this table.
A value with a negative overflow at the IN1 input is less than a value with a positive overflow at the IN2 input.
Input IN2 Input IN1
Positive Overflow Negative Overflow Invalid Value Valid Value
Positive Over- Not equal to, not less Less than Not equal to, not less Less than
flow than, not greater than than, not greater than
Negative Greater than Not equal to, not less Not equal to, not less Greater than
Overflow than, not greater than than, not greater than
Invalid Value Not equal to, not less Not equal to, not less Not equal to, not less Not equal to,
than, not greater than than, not greater than than, not greater than not less than,
not greater
than
Valid Value Greater than Less than Not equal to, not less ---
than, not greater than

Related Topics
5.1.4 Block
5.5.9 Setting Parameters for Block Connections
9.3 Generic Data Types

10.3.2 LIMIT

Connections and Explanations

You can find explanations for the connections of the block in the following table:
Name Data Type Explanation Default
Inputs MN ANY_NUM Lower limit 0
IN ANY_NUM Input value 0
MX ANY_NUM Upper limit 0
Outputs OUT ANY_NUM, Limited value or input value
depending
on basic
data type of
input

Detailed Description
The block compares the value at the IN input with the upper and lower limits MN and MX. If the input value is
below or above the defined limits, the block sets the output to the reached limit. If not, the block sets the
output to the IN value.

Related Topics
5.1.4 Block
5.5.9 Setting Parameters for Block Connections
9.3 Generic Data Types

136 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
 Instructions (Blocks)
10.3 Compare

10.3.3 LE

The LE block compares 2 input values of data type ANY_NUM. If input value 1 is less than or equal to input
value 2, the block sets the output to 1.

Connections and Explanations

You can find explanations for the connections of the block in the following table:
Name Data Type Explanation Default
Inputs IN1 ANY_NUM Input value 1 0
IN2 ANY_NUM Input value 2 0
Outputs OUT BOOL 1: IN1 <= IN2
0: IN1 > IN2

Basic data types of IN1 and IN2 must be equal.

Detailed Description
The block compares the value at the IN1 input with the value at the IN2 input. If the value at the IN1 input is
less than or equal to the value at the IN2 input, the block sets the OUT output to 1.
The following table shows how the block processes special values. These special values include values with a
positive or negative overflow, as well as invalid values. An example is used to illustrate how to read this table.
A value with a negative overflow at the IN1 input is less than a value with a positive overflow at the IN2 input.
Input IN2 Input IN1
Positive Overflow Negative Overflow Invalid Value Valid Value
Positive Over- Not equal to, not less Less than Not equal to, not less Less than
flow than, not greater than than, not greater than
Negative Greater than Not equal to, not less Not equal to, not less Greater than
Overflow than, not greater than than, not greater than
Invalid Value Not equal to, not less Not equal to, not less Not equal to, not less Not equal to,
than, not greater than than, not greater than than, not greater than not less than,
not greater
than
Valid Value Greater than Less than Not equal to, not less ---
than, not greater than

Related Topics
5.1.4 Block
5.5.9 Setting Parameters for Block Connections
9.3 Generic Data Types

10.3.4 GE

The GE block compares the values of 2 inputs of data type ANY_NUM. If input value 1 is greater than or equal
to input value 2, the block sets the output to 1.

Connections and Explanations

You can find explanations for the connections of the block in the following table:

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 137

, Edition 02.2022
Instructions (Blocks)
10.3 Compare

Name Data Type Explanation Default

Inputs IN1 ANY_NUM Input value 1 0
IN2 ANY_NUM Input value 2 0
Outputs OUT BOOL 1: IN1 >= IN2
0: IN1 < IN2

Basic data types of IN1 and IN2 must be equal.

Detailed Description
The block compares the value at the IN1 input with the value at the IN2 input. If the value at the IN1 input is
greater than or equal to the value at the IN2 input, the block sets the OUT output to 1.
The following table shows how the block processes special values. These special values include values with a
positive or negative overflow, as well as invalid values. An example is used to illustrate how to read this table.
A value with a negative overflow at the IN1 input is less than a value with a positive overflow at the IN2 input.
Input IN2 Input IN1
Positive Overflow Negative Overflow Invalid Value Valid Value
Positive Over- Not equal to, not less Less than Not equal to, not less Less than
flow than, not greater than than, not greater than
Negative Greater than Not equal to, not less Not equal to, not less Greater than
Overflow than, not greater than than, not greater than
Invalid Value Not equal to, not less Not equal to, not less Not equal to, not less Not equal to,
than, not greater than than, not greater than than, not greater than not less than,
not greater
than
Valid Value Greater than Less than Not equal to, not less ---
than, not greater than

Related Topics
5.1.4 Block
5.5.9 Setting Parameters for Block Connections
9.3 Generic Data Types

10.3.5 GT

The GT block compares 2 inputs of data type ANY_NUM. If input value 1 is greater than input value 2, the
block sets the output to 1.

Connections and Explanations

You can find explanations for the connections of the block in the following table:
Name Data Type Explanation Default
Inputs IN1 ANY_NUM Input value 1 0
IN2 ANY_NUM Input value 2 0
Outputs OUT BOOL 1: IN1 > IN2
0: IN1 <= IN2

Basic data types of IN1 and IN2 must be equal.

Detailed Description
The block compares the value at the IN1 input with the value at the IN2 input. If the value at the IN1 input is
greater than the value at the IN2 input, the block sets the OUT output to 1.

138 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
 Instructions (Blocks)
10.3 Compare

The following table shows how the block processes special values. These special values include values with a
positive or negative overflow, as well as invalid values. An example is used to illustrate how to read this table.
A value with a negative overflow at the IN1 input is less than a value with a positive overflow at the IN2 input.
Input IN2 Input IN1
Positive Overflow Negative Overflow Invalid Value Valid Value
Positive Over- Not equal to, not less Less than Not equal to, not less Less than
flow than, not greater than than, not greater than
Negative Greater than Not equal to, not less Not equal to, not less Greater than
Overflow than, not greater than than, not greater than
Invalid Value Not equal to, not less Not equal to, not less Not equal to, not less Not equal to,
than, not greater than than, not greater than than, not greater than not less than,
not greater
than
Valid Value Greater than Less than Not equal to, not less ---
than, not greater than

Related Topics
5.1.4 Block
5.5.9 Setting Parameters for Block Connections
9.3 Generic Data Types

10.3.6 EQ

The EQ block compares 2 input values of data type ANY_ELEMENTARY. If input value 1 is equal to input value
2, the block sets the output to 1.

Connections and Explanations

You can find explanations for the connections of the block in the following table:
Name Data Type Explanation Default
Inputs IN1 ANY_ELEME Input value 1 0
NTARY
IN2 ANY_ELEME Input value 2 0
NTARY
Outputs OUT BOOL 1: IN1 == IN2
0: IN1 <> IN2

Basic data types of IN1 and IN2 must be equal.

Detailed Description
The block compares the value at the IN1 input with the value at the IN2 input. If the value at the IN1 input is
equal to the value at the IN2 input, the block sets the OUT output to 1.
The following table shows how the block processes special values. These special values include values with a
positive or negative overflow, as well as invalid values. An example is used to illustrate how to read this table.
A value with a negative overflow at the IN1 input is less than a value with a positive overflow at the IN2 input.
Input IN2 Input IN1
Positive Overflow Negative Overflow Invalid Value Valid Value
Positive Over- Not equal to, not less Less than Not equal to, not less Less than
flow than, not greater than than, not greater than
Negative Greater than Not equal to, not less Not equal to, not less Greater than
Overflow than, not greater than than, not greater than

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 139

, Edition 02.2022
Instructions (Blocks)
10.3 Compare

Invalid Value Not equal to, not less Not equal to, not less Not equal to, not less Not equal to,
than, not greater than than, not greater than than, not greater than not less than,
not greater
than
Valid Value Greater than Less than Not equal to, not less ---
than, not greater than

Related Topics
5.1.4 Block
5.5.9 Setting Parameters for Block Connections
9.3 Generic Data Types

10.3.7 NE

The NE block compares 2 input values of data type ANY_ELEMENTARY. If input value 1 is not equal to input
value 2, the block sets the output to 1.

Connections and Explanations

You can find explanations for the connections of the block in the following table:
Name Data Type Explanation Default
Inputs IN1 ANY_ELEME Input value 1 0
NTARY
IN2 ANY_ELEME Input value 2 0
NTARY
Outputs OUT BOOL 1: IN1 <> IN2
0: IN1 == IN2

Basic data types of IN1 and IN2 must be equal.

Detailed Description
The block compares the value at the IN1 input with the value at the IN2 input. If the value at the IN1 input is
not equal to the value at the IN2 input, the block sets the OUT output to 1.
The following table shows how the block processes special values. These special values include values with a
positive or negative overflow, as well as invalid values. An example is used to illustrate how to read this table.
A value with a negative overflow at the IN1 input is less than a value with a positive overflow at the IN2 input.
Input IN2 Input IN1
Positive Overflow Negative Overflow Invalid Value Valid Value
Positive Over- Not equal to, not less Less than Not equal to, not less Less than
flow than, not greater than than, not greater than
Negative Greater than Not equal to, not less Not equal to, not less Greater than
Overflow than, not greater than than, not greater than
Invalid Value Not equal to, not less Not equal to, not less Not equal to, not less Not equal to,
than, not greater than than, not greater than than, not greater than not less than,
not greater
than
Valid Value Greater than Less than Not equal to, not less ---
than, not greater than

Related Topics
5.1.4 Block
5.5.9 Setting Parameters for Block Connections

140 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
 Instructions (Blocks)
10.4 Timer and Counter

9.3 Generic Data Types

10.3.8 LIMIT_UPPER_HYS

Connections and Explanations

Name Data Type Explanation Default

Inputs IN ANY_NUM Input value 0
LIMIT ANY_NUM Limit value 0
HYS ANY_NUM Hysteresis 0
Output OUT BOOL Output value 0

Detailed Description
In this block the output variable OUT gets true if the input variable IN exceeds a preset limit value LIMIT. Input
of a hysteresis HYS influences the resetting of the output OUT; this means the resetting value is diminished by
the hysteresis HYS. In case of negative hysteresis HYS, zero is assumed.

Related Topics
5.1.4 Block
5.5.9 Setting Parameters for Block Connections
9.3 Generic Data Types

10.3.9 LIMIT_LOWER_HYS

Connections and Explanations

Name Data Type Explanation Default

Inputs IN ANY_NUM Input value 0
LIMIT ANY_NUM Limit value 0
HYS ANY_NUM Hysteresis 0
Output OUT BOOL Output value 0

Detailed Description
In this block the output variable OUT gets true if the input variable IN falls below a preset limit value LIMIT.
Input of a hysteresis HYS influences the resetting of the output OUT; this means the resetting value is
increased by the hysteresis HYS. In case of negative hysteresis HYS, zero is assumed.

Related Topics
5.1.4 Block
5.5.9 Setting Parameters for Block Connections
9.3 Generic Data Types

10.4 Timer and Counter

10.4.1 TOF

The TOF block delays falling edges of a binary signal in the millisecond range.

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 141

, Edition 02.2022
Instructions (Blocks)
10.4 Timer and Counter

Connections and Explanations

You can find explanations for the connections of the block in the following table:
Name Data Type Explanation Default
Inputs IN BOOL State change from 1 to 0 starts the time delay 0
PT DINT Value for the time delay, in milliseconds 0
Outputs Q BOOL 0: Time delay has elapsed
1: Time delay is still ongoing or has not been started
ET DINT Elapsed time delay

Detailed Description
The block forwards a state change from 0 to 1 at the IN input to the Q output directly. The block displays a
state change from 1 to 0 at the Q output, delayed by time PT. If the IN input adopts a value of 1 again while
the time delay is still ongoing, the Q output remains at 1.
The block has an additional ET output. You can use this output to check the time delay which has already
elapsed. The value at the ET output increases in small stages during the PT time delay from 0 up to the PT
value. One stage and, consequently, the rate of increase in the value depend on the cycle time. This depend-
ency means that you may only interconnect this output in cyclic task levels.
The following figure illustrates the way in which the block works:

Related Topics
5.1.4 Block
5.5.9 Setting Parameters for Block Connections

10.4.2 TON

The TON block delays rising edges of a binary signal in the millisecond range.

Connections and Explanations

You can find explanations for the connections of the block in the following table:
Name Data Type Explanation Default
Inputs IN BOOL State change from 0 to 1 starts the time delay 0
PT DINT Value for the time delay, in milliseconds 0
Outputs Q BOOL 1: Time delay has elapsed
0: Time delay is still ongoing or has not been started
ET DINT Elapsed time delay

142 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
 Instructions (Blocks)
10.4 Timer and Counter

Detailed Description
A state change from 0 to 1 at the IN input is displayed by the block at the Q output, delayed by time PT. The
block forwards a state change from 1 to 0 to the Q output directly. If the IN input adopts a value of 0 again
while the time delay is still ongoing, the Q output remains at 0.
The block has an additional ET output. You can use this output to check the time delay which has already
elapsed. The value at the ET output increases in small stages during the PT time delay from 0 up to the PT
value. One stage and, consequently, the rate of increase in the value depend on the cycle time. This depend-
ency means that you may only interconnect this output in cyclic task levels.
The following figure illustrates the way in which the block works:

Related Topics
5.1.4 Block
5.5.9 Setting Parameters for Block Connections

10.4.3 TP

The TP block is a timer for short-time intervals in the second range that cannot be interrupted.

Connections and Explanations

You can find explanations for the connections of the block in the following table:
Name Data Type Explanation Default
Inputs IN BOOL State change from 0 to 1 starts the time interval 0
PT DINT Length of the time interval in milliseconds (resolution 0
1 ms)
Outputs Q BOOL 1: Time interval elapsing
0: Time interval not elapsing
ET DINT Elapsed time

Detailed Description
You set the length of the time interval at the PT input with a resolution of 1 ms.
A state change from 0 to 1 at the IN input starts the time interval PT. The Q output adopts a value of 1. A
further state change at the IN input does not affect the progress of the time interval. Once the time interval
has elapsed, the Q output is set to 0. Only then can you start a new time interval.
The block has an additional output ET. You can use this output to check the time which has already elapsed.
The value at the ET output increases in small stages during the PT time interval from 0 up to the PT value. A

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 143

, Edition 02.2022
Instructions (Blocks)
10.4 Timer and Counter

stage and, consequently, the rate of increase in the value depend on the cycle time. This dependency means
that you may only interconnect this output in cyclic task levels.
The following figure illustrates the way in which the block works:

Related Topics
5.1.4 Block
5.5.9 Setting Parameters for Block Connections

10.4.4 BLINK

The BLINK block generates a continuous state change from 0 to 1 and from 1 to 0 at the output. Therefore,
the block is suitable for controlling LEDs which are intended to flash, for example.

Connections and Explanations

You can find explanations for the connections of the block in the following table:
Name Data Type Explanation Default
Inputs START BOOL 1: State changes at the Q output 0
0: No state changes at the Q output
TH DINT Length of On phase in milliseconds (resolution 100 10 (equates
ms) to 1 s)
TL DINT Length of Off phase in milliseconds (resolution 100 10 (equates
ms) to 1 s)
Outputs Q BOOL If 1 is present at the START input, there is a state
change in accordance with the set times

Detailed Description
The block always starts with the ON phase. As long as the START input has a value of 1, the Q output changes
its state from 0 to 1 and from 1 to 0 in accordance with the set times.
You can set the lengths for the ON and OFF phases separately. In order to do this, use the TH and TL inputs.

NOTE

i The resolution for the lengths of the ON and OFF phases is 100 ms. This means that, depending on the
start time, the first ON phase can follow up to 99 ms after the set TH value.
If a cyclic task level has been set for the block, the minimum possible phase length corresponds to the dura-
tion of 1 cycle.

144 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
 Instructions (Blocks)
10.4 Timer and Counter

Related Topics
5.1.4 Block

10.4.5 CTD

The CTD (Count Down) block counts down, starting at a defined start value. The current counter value
decreases by 1 with every counting step. You can select from various tripping criteria to start the count.

Connections and Explanations

You can find explanations for the connections of the block in the following table:
Name Data Type Explanation Default
Inputs CD BOOL Counter pulse for counting down 0
Depending on the value at the EDGE input, a contin-
uous 1 or a state change decreases the metered value
by 1
LD BOOL State change from 0 to 1 adopts the value at the PV 0
input as the start value
PV DINT Start value 0
EDGE DINT 0: Block counts on rising edge at the CD input 0
1: Block counts on every state change at the CD input
(rising or falling edge)
2: Block counts when CD is set static to 1 each time
the chart is executed
Outputs CV DINT Current counter value
Q BOOL 1: The value at the CV output is less than or equal to
0
0: The value at the CV output is greater than 0

Detailed Description
The value at the PV input equates to the start value. As soon as the value at the LD input is 1, the block adopts
this start value as the value for the CV output. The downward-counting procedure is controlled using the CD
input. If the value at the LD input is 1, the block stops the count and sets the Q output to 0, the CV output to
the value of the PV input.
The value at the EDGE input determines the counting criterion. You can select from the following counting
criteria:

• EDGE = 0
The block decreases the metered value each time there is a state change from 0 to 1 (rising edge) at the
CD input.

• EDGE = 1
The block decreases the metered value each time there is a state change at the CD input.

• EDGE = 2
The block decreases the metered value each time a chart is executed. On a cyclic task level, therefore, the
metered value changes with every cycle. As a precondition for this tripping criterion, the value at the CD
input must be static 1.
If the value 0 is reached when counting down, the block sets the Q output to 1. However, the count continues
as long as all criteria are met. The block has a counting range which is defined by the PVmin and PVmax limiting
values which you cannot change. Once the lower limiting value PVmin is reached, the block cannot count
down any further. However, the current counter value at the CV output is retained until the value at the LD
input is 1.

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 145

, Edition 02.2022
Instructions (Blocks)
10.4 Timer and Counter

Related Topics
5.1.4 Block

10.4.6 CTU

The CTU (Count Up) block counts up to a defined final value, starting at 0. The current counter value increases
by 1 with every counting step. You can select from various tripping criteria to start the count.

Connections and Explanations

You can find explanations for the connections of the block in the following table:
Name Data Type Explanation Default
Inputs CU BOOL Counter pulse for counting up 0
Depending on the value at the EDGE input, a contin-
uous 1 or a state change increases the counter value
by 1
R BOOL State change from 0 to 1 resets the CV and Q outputs 0
to 0
PV DINT Final value 0
EDGE DINT 0: Block counts on rising edge at the CU input 0
1: Block counts on every state change at the CU input
(rising or falling edge)
2: Block counts when CU is set static to 1 each time
the chart is executed
Outputs CV DINT Current counter value
Q BOOL 1: The value at the CV output is greater than or equal
to the final value at the PV input
0: The value at the CV output is less than the final
value at the PV input

Detailed Description
The value at the PV input equates to the final value. The upward counting procedure is controlled using the
CU input. If the value at the R input is 1, the block stops the count and sets all outputs to 0.
The value at the EDGE input determines the counting criterion. You can select from the following counting
criteria:

• EDGE = 0
The block increases the metered value each time there is a state change from 0 to 1 (rising edge) at the
CU input.

• EDGE = 1
The block increases the metered value each time there is a state change at the CU input.

• EDGE = 2
The block increases the metered value each time a chart is executed. On a cyclic task level, therefore, the
metered value changes with every cycle. As a precondition for this tripping criterion, the value at the CU
input must be static 1.
If the final value is reached when counting up, the block sets the Q output to 1. However, the count continues
as long as all criteria are met. The block has a counting range which is defined by the PVmin and PVmax limiting
values which you cannot change. Once the upper limiting value PVmax is reached, the block cannot count up
any further. However, the current counter value at the CV output is retained until the value at the R input is 1.

146 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
 Instructions (Blocks)
10.4 Timer and Counter

Related Topics
5.1.4 Block

10.4.7 CTUD

The CTUD (Count Up and Down) block counts up starting from 0 or down starting from a definable start value.
You can select from various tripping criteria to start the count.

Connections and Explanations

You can find explanations for the connections of the block in the following table:
Name Data Type Explanation Default
Inputs CU BOOL Counter pulse for counting up 0
Depending on the value at the EDGE input, a contin-
uous 1 or a state change increases the counter value
by 1.
CD BOOL Counter pulse for counting down 0
Depending on the value at the EDGE input, a contin-
uous 1 or a state change decreases the counter value
by 1.
R BOOL State change from 0 to 1 resets the CV, QU, and QD 0
outputs to 0
LD BOOL State change from 0 to 1 adopts the value at the PV 0
input as the start value for counting down
PV DINT Final value when counting up 0
Start value when counting down
EDGE DINT 0: Block counts on rising edge at the CU or CD input 0
1: Block counts on every state change at the CU or CD
input (rising or falling edge)
2: Block counts when CU or CD is set static to 1 each
time the chart is executed
Outputs CV DINT Current counter value 0
QU BOOL Only relevant for counting up 0
1: The value at the CV output is greater than or equal
to the final value at the PV input
0: The value at the CV output is less than the final
value at the PV input
QD BOOL Only relevant for counting down 0
1: The value at the CV output is less than or equal to
0
0: The value at the CV output is greater than 0

Detailed Description
If the block is to count up, the value at the PV input equates to the final value. If the block is to count down,
the value at the PV input equates to the start value. As soon as the value at the LD input is 1, the block adopts
this start value.
The upward counting procedure is controlled using the CU input. The downward counting procedure is
controlled using the CD input.

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 147

, Edition 02.2022
Instructions (Blocks)
10.5 Flip-Flops

The value at the EDGE input determines the counting criterion. You can select from the following counting
criteria:

• EDGE = 0
The block increases the metered value each time there is a state change from 0 to 1 (rising edge) at the
CU or CD input.

• EDGE = 1
The block increases the metered value each time there is a state change at the CU or CD input.

• EDGE = 2
The block increases the metered value each time a chart is executed. On a cyclic task level, therefore, the
metered value changes with every cycle. As a precondition for this tripping criterion, the value at the CU
or CD input must be static 1.
If the final value is reached when counting up, the block sets the QU output to 1. If the value 0 is reached
when counting down, the block sets the QD output to 1. However, in both cases the count continues as long
as all criteria are met. The block has a counting range which is defined by the PVmin and PVmax limiting values
and which you cannot change. Once the lower limiting value PVmin is reached, the block cannot count down
any further. Once the upper limiting value PVmax is reached, the block cannot count up any further. However,
the current counter value at the CV output is retained until the value at the R or LD input is 1.
Under the following conditions, the block does not count up or down:

• The value at the R input is 1. In this case, the value at the CV output is 0.

• The value at the R input is 0 and the value at the LD input is 1. In this case, the CV output adopts the
value at the PV input.

• The values at the R and LD inputs are 0 and the values at the CD and CU inputs are 1.

Related Topics
5.1.4 Block

10.5 Flip-Flops

10.5.1 SR

The SR block is a bistable function block with a dominant set.

Connections and Explanations

You can find explanations for the connections of the block in the following table:
Name Data Type Explanation Default
Inputs S BOOL 1: Sets the OUT output 0
R BOOL 1: Resets the OUT output 0
Output OUT BOOL 0 or 1

Detailed Description
If a 1 is present at the S input, the block sets the OUT output to a value of 1. This value is retained until the R
input adopts a value of 1. The block also sets the output if the S and R inputs adopt a value of 1 at the same
time. When the device is restarted, the value at the output is lost.

Related Topics
5.1.4 Block
10.5.2 RS

148 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
 Instructions (Blocks)
10.6 Edge Detection

5.5.9 Setting Parameters for Block Connections

10.5.2 RS

The RS block is a bistable function block with a dominant reset input.

Connections and Explanations

You can find explanations for the connections of the block in the following table:
Name Data Type Explanation Default
Inputs R BOOL 1: Resets the OUT output 0
S BOOL 1: Sets the OUT output 0
Output OUT BOOL 0 or 1

Detailed Description
If a 1 is present at the S input, the block sets the OUT output to a value of 1. This value is retained until the R
input adopts a value of 1. The block also resets the output if the S and R inputs adopt a value of 1 at the same
time. When the device is restarted, the value at the output is lost.

Related Topics
5.1.4 Block
10.5.1 SR
5.5.9 Setting Parameters for Block Connections

10.6 Edge Detection

10.6.1 R_TRIG

The R_TRIG block detects the rising edge of a binary signal at the input and sets the output to 1. This block
also detects very brief state changes.

Connections and Explanations

You can find explanations for the connections of the block in the following table:
Name Data Type Explanation Default
Input CLK BOOL Input value 0
Output Q BOOL 1: From 0 to 1 following a
state change

Detailed Description
When there is a state change from 0 to 1 at the CLK input, the block sets output Q to 1. The output retains the
value 1 until the block is processed again during the chart run. At this point the block sets the output back to
0, irrespective of what value is present at the input at that time.
The time that elapses before the block is processed again depends on the task level selected for the block or
chart. With cyclic Measurement task level, the time is 500 ms. With event-triggered task levels, the time
cannot be forecast.

Related Topics
5.1.4 Block
10.6.2 F_TRIG

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 149

, Edition 02.2022
Instructions (Blocks)
10.7 Selection

5.5.9 Setting Parameters for Block Connections

10.6.2 F_TRIG

The F_TRIG block detects the falling edge of a binary signal at the input and sets the output to 1. This block
also detects very brief state changes.

Connections and Explanations

You can find explanations for the connections of the block in the following table:
Name Data Type Explanation Default
Input CLK BOOL Input value 0
Output Q BOOL 1: From 1 to 0 following a
state change

Detailed Description
When there is a state change from 1 to 0 at the CLK input, the block sets output Q to 1. The output retains the
value 1 until the block is processed again during the chart run. At this point the block sets the output back to
0, irrespective of what value is present at the input at that time.
The time that elapses before the block is processed again depends on the task level selected for the block or
chart. With cyclic Measurement task level, the time is 500 ms. With event-driven task levels, the time cannot
be forecast.

Related Topics
5.1.4 Block
10.6.1 R_TRIG
5.5.9 Setting Parameters for Block Connections

10.7 Selection

10.7.1 MIN

The MIN block uses up to 10 input values of data type ANY_NUM to determine the minimum value.

Connections and Explanations

You can find explanations for the connections of the block in the following table:

150 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
 Instructions (Blocks)
10.7 Selection

Name Data Type Explanation Default

Inputs IN1 ANY_NUM Input value 1 0
IN2 ANY_NUM Input value 2 0
IN3 ANY_NUM Input value 3 0
IN4 ANY_NUM Input value 4 0
IN5 ANY_NUM Input value 5 0
IN6 ANY_NUM Input value 6 0
IN7 ANY_NUM Input value 7 0
IN8 ANY_NUM Input value 8 0
IN9 ANY_NUM Input value 9 0
IN10 ANY_NUM Input value 10 0
Outputs OUT ANY_NUM, Minimum value present at the inputs IN1 to IN10
depending
on basic
data type of
input

Detailed Description
The block determines the minimum value from those at the inputs IN1 to IN10. This minimum value is then
available at the OUT output.

Related Topics
5.1.4 Block
5.5.9 Setting Parameters for Block Connections
9.3 Generic Data Types

10.7.2 MAX

The MAX block uses up to 10 input values of data type ANY_NUM to determine the maximum value.

Connections and Explanations

You can find explanations for the connections of the block in the following table:
Name Data Type Explanation Default
Inputs IN1 ANY_NUM Input value 1 0
IN2 ANY_NUM Input value 2 0
IN3 ANY_NUM Input value 3 0
IN4 ANY_NUM Input value 4 0
IN5 ANY_NUM Input value 5 0
IN6 ANY_NUM Input value 6 0
IN7 ANY_NUM Input value 7 0
IN8 ANY_NUM Input value 8 0
IN9 ANY_NUM Input value 9 0
IN10 ANY_NUM Input value 10 0
Outputs OUT ANY_NUM, Maximum value present at the inputs IN1 to IN10
depending
on basic
data type of
input

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 151

, Edition 02.2022
Instructions (Blocks)
10.7 Selection

Detailed Description
The block determines the maximum value from those at the inputs IN1 to IN10. This maximum value is then
available at the OUT output.

Related Topics
5.1.4 Block
5.5.9 Setting Parameters for Block Connections
9.3 Generic Data Types

10.7.3 MUX

Depending on a selection value, the MUX block transmits exactly 1 out of up to 10 input values of data type
ANY_ELEMENTARY to the output.

Connections and Explanations

You can find explanations for the connections of the block in the following table:
Name Data Type Explanation Default
Inputs IN0 ANY_ELEME Input value 0 0
NTARY
IN1 ANY_ELEME Input value 1 0
NTARY
IN2 ANY_ELEME Input value 2 0
NTARY
IN3 ANY_ELEME Input value 3 0
NTARY
IN4 ANY_ELEME Input value 4 0
NTARY
IN5 ANY_ELEME Input value 5 0
NTARY
IN6 ANY_ELEME Input value 6 0
NTARY
IN7 ANY_ELEME Input value 7 0
NTARY
IN8 ANY_ELEME Input value 8 0
NTARY
IN9 ANY_ELEME Input value 9 0
NTARY
K DINT Selection value 0
Outputs OUT ANY_ELEME Input value K (value of input IN0 to IN9, depending
NTARY, on input K).
depending
on basic
data type of
input

Detailed Description
Depending on the value of input K, the block selects the value of the corresponding input (IN0 to IN9) and
outputs it at OUT.

152 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
 Instructions (Blocks)
10.7 Selection

NOTE

i If K is outside the range (0 to 9), there is a device-specific behavior which you have to check.

Related Topics
5.1.4 Block
5.5.9 Setting Parameters for Block Connections
9.3 Generic Data Types

10.7.4 SEL

Connections and Explanations

Name Data Type Explanation

Inputs IN0 ANY_ELEMENTARY Input value 0
IN1 ANY_ELEMENTARY Input value 1
G BOOL SELECTOR
Outputs OUT ANY_ELEMENTARY, depending on basic Input 0 or 1, depending on G
data type of input

Detailed Description
If the input G is true, input IN1 will be used as output OUT for the block, else the input IN0 will be used as
output.

Related Topics
5.1.4 Block
5.5.9 Setting Parameters for Block Connections
9.3 Generic Data Types

10.7.5 MOVE_B

Connections and Explanations

Name Data Type

Inputs IN BOOL
Outputs OUT BOOL

Detailed Description
The MOVE_B block connects an input value with an output value of type BOOL without changes.

Alternative Instructions
If you have to process floating-point numbers, use the MOVE_R block instead of MOVE_B.
If you have to process integer numbers, use the MOVE_D block instead of MOVE_B.

Related Topics
5.1.4 Block
5.5.9 Setting Parameters for Block Connections

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 153

, Edition 02.2022
Instructions (Blocks)
10.7 Selection

10.7.6 MOVE_D

Connections and Explanations

Name Data Type

Inputs IN DINT
Outputs OUT DINT

Detailed Description
The MOVE_D block connects an input value with an output value of type DINT without changes.

Alternative Instructions
If you have to process boolean values, use the MOVE_B block instead of MOVE_D.
If you have to process floating-point numbers, use the MOVE_R block instead of MOVE_D.

Related Topics
5.1.4 Block
5.5.9 Setting Parameters for Block Connections

10.7.7 MOVE_R

Connections and Explanations

Name Data Type

Inputs IN REAL
Outputs OUT REAL

Detailed Description
The MOVE_R block connects an input value with an output value of type REAL without changes.

Alternative Instructions
If you have to process boolean values, use the MOVE_B block instead of MOVE_R.
If you have to process integer numbers, use the MOVE_D block instead of MOVE_R.

Related Topics
5.1.4 Block
5.5.9 Setting Parameters for Block Connections

10.7.8 MOVE

Connections and Explanations

Name Data Type

Inputs IN ANY_TYPE
Outputs OUT ANY_TYPE

Detailed Description
The MOVE block connects an input value with an output value without changes.

154 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
 Instructions (Blocks)
10.7 Selection

Alternative Instructions
The block should not be used for type BOOL, because during the online test boolean values might not be
shown at the output. If you have to process boolean values, use MOVE_B block instead.

Related Topics
5.1.4 Block
5.5.9 Setting Parameters for Block Connections

10.7.9 MOVE_T

Connections and Explanations

Name Data Type

Inputs IN TIME
Outputs OUT TIME

Detailed Description
The MOVE_T block connects an input value with an output value of type TIME without changes.

Related Topics
5.1.4 Block
5.5.9 Setting Parameters for Block Connections

10.7.10 MOVE_S

Connections and Explanations

Name Data Type

Inputs IN STRUCT
Outputs OUT STRUCT

Detailed Description
The MOVE_S block connects 2 structures of the same type.

Related Topics
5.1.4 Block
5.5.9 Setting Parameters for Block Connections

10.7.11 MOVE_DW

Connections and Explanations

Name Data Type

Inputs IN DWORD
Outputs OUT DWORD

Detailed Description
The MOVE_DW block connects an input value with an output value of type DWORD without changes.

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 155

, Edition 02.2022
Instructions (Blocks)
10.8 Power and Exponent

Related Topics
5.1.4 Block
5.5.9 Setting Parameters for Block Connections

10.8 Power and Exponent

10.8.1 LOG

The LOG block calculates the common logarithm of an input value of data type ANY_REAL.

Connections and Explanations

You can find explanations for the connections of the block in the following table:
Name Data Type Explanation Default
Input IN ANY_REAL Antilogarithm 0.0
Output OUT ANY_REAL Result of function
log10(IN)

Detailed Description
The block calculates the common logarithm of the value at the IN input. The common logarithm is the loga-
rithm with base 10. The result of the logarithm function is available at the OUT output.

Related Topics
5.1.4 Block
5.5.9 Setting Parameters for Block Connections
9.3 Generic Data Types

10.8.2 LN

The LN block calculates the natural logarithm of an input value of data type ANY_REAL.

Connections and Explanations

You can find explanations for the connections of the block in the following table:
Name Data Type Explanation Default
Input IN ANY_REAL Antilogarithm 0.0
Output OUT ANY_REAL Result of function
LN(IN)

Detailed Description
The block calculates the natural logarithm of the value at the IN input. The natural logarithm is the logarithm
with base e. The result of the logarithm function is available at the OUT output.

Related Topics
5.1.4 Block
5.5.9 Setting Parameters for Block Connections
9.3 Generic Data Types

156 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
 Instructions (Blocks)
10.8 Power and Exponent

10.8.3 EXP

The EXP block calculates the natural exponential function of an input value of data type ANY_REAL (expo-
nent).

Connections and Explanations

You can find explanations for the connections of the block in the following table:
Name Data Type Explanation Default
Input IN ANY_REAL Exponent 0.0
Output OUT ANY_REAL Result of function
exp(IN)

Detailed Description
The EXP block calculates the natural exponential function of the value at the IN input. The natural exponential
function is the exponential function with base e. The result of the exponential function is available at the OUT
output.
If the representable number area (0<= (IN*LD(e)) <=2^15) is underrun/exceeded, the smallest/largest repre-
sentable value is output.

Related Topics
5.1.4 Block
5.5.9 Setting Parameters for Block Connections
9.3 Generic Data Types

10.8.4 EXPT

The EXPT block calculates the exponential function of an input value of data type ANY_REAL (exponent) to a
2nd input value of data type ANY_REAL (base).

Connections and Explanations

You can find explanations for the connections of the block in the following table:
Name Data Type Explanation Default
Inputs INBASE ANY_REAL Base 0.0
IN_EXP ANY_REAL Exponent 0.0
Output OUT ANY_REAL Result of the function
pow (INBASE, IN_EXP)

Detailed Description
The block calculates the exponential function of the exponent IN_EXP to the base INBASE. The result of the
exponential function is available at the OUT output.
If the representable number area is underrun/exceeded, the smallest/largest representable value is output.
If a negative value is entered for INBASE, the output is set to 0.

Related Topics
5.1.4 Block
5.5.9 Setting Parameters for Block Connections
9.3 Generic Data Types

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 157

, Edition 02.2022
Instructions (Blocks)
10.9 Trigonometry

10.8.5 SQRT

The SQRT block calculates the square root of an input value of data type ANY_REAL (radicand).

Connections and Explanations

You can find explanations for the connections of the block in the following table:
Name Data Type Explanation Default
Input IN ANY_REAL Radicand 0.0
Output OUT ANY_REAL Result of function
sqrt(IN)

Detailed Description
The block calculates the square root of the value at the IN input. The result of the square-root extraction is
available at the OUT output.

Related Topics
5.1.4 Block
5.5.9 Setting Parameters for Block Connections
9.3 Generic Data Types

10.9 Trigonometry

10.9.1 SIN

The SIN block calculates the sine of an input value of data type ANY_REAL (angle).

Connections and Explanations

You can find explanations for the connections of the block in the following table:
Name Data Type Explanation Default
Input IN ANY_REAL Angle in radian measure 0.0
Output OUT ANY_REAL Result of function
sin(IN)

Detailed Description
The block calculates the sine of the value at the IN input. The result of the sine function is available at the OUT
output.

Related Topics
5.1.4 Block
5.5.9 Setting Parameters for Block Connections
9.3 Generic Data Types

10.9.2 ASIN

The ASIN block calculates the arcsine of an input value of data type ANY_REAL.

158 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
 Instructions (Blocks)
10.9 Trigonometry

Connections and Explanations

You can find explanations for the connections of the block in the following table:
Name Data Type Explanation Default
Input IN ANY_REAL Input value (-1.0 to 1.0) 0.0
Output OUT ANY_REAL Result of function
asin(IN) in radian measure

Detailed Description
The block calculates the arc sine of the value at the IN input. The arc sine is the inverse function of the
restricted sine function. The result of the arc-sine function is available at the OUT output.
The value at the input IN must be in the area from -1 to +1.

Related Topics
5.1.4 Block
5.5.9 Setting Parameters for Block Connections
9.3 Generic Data Types

10.9.3 COS

The COS block calculates the cosine of an input value of data type ANY_REAL (angle).

Connections and Explanations

You can find explanations for the connections of the block in the following table:
Name Data Type Explanation Default
Input IN ANY_REAL Angle in radian measure 0.0
Output OUT ANY_REAL Result of function
cos(IN)

Detailed Description
The block calculates the cosine of the value at the IN input. The result of the cosine function is available at the
OUT output.

Related Topics
5.1.4 Block
5.5.9 Setting Parameters for Block Connections
9.3 Generic Data Types

10.9.4 ACOS

The ACOS block calculates the arccosine of an input value of data type ANY_REAL.

Connections and Explanations

You can find explanations for the connections of the block in the following table.
Name Data Type Explanation Default
Input IN ANY_REAL Input value (-1.0 to 1.0) 0.0
Output OUT ANY_REAL Result of function
acos(IN) in radian measure

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 159

, Edition 02.2022
Instructions (Blocks)
10.9 Trigonometry

Detailed Description
The block calculates the arc cosine of the value at the IN input. The arccosine is the inverse function of the
restricted cosine function. The result of the arccosine function is available at the OUT output.
The value at the input IN must be in the area from -1 to +1.

Related Topics
5.1.4 Block
5.5.9 Setting Parameters for Block Connections
9.3 Generic Data Types

10.9.5 TAN

The TAN block calculates the tangent of an input value of data type ANY_REAL (angle).

Connections and Explanations

You can find explanations for the connections of the block in the following table:
Name Data Type Explanation Default
Input IN ANY_REAL Angle in radian measure 0.0
Output OUT ANY_REAL Result of function
tan(IN)

Detailed Description
The block calculates the tangent of the value at the IN input. The result of the tangent function is available at
the OUT output.

Related Topics
5.1.4 Block
5.5.9 Setting Parameters for Block Connections
9.3 Generic Data Types

10.9.6 ATAN

The ATAN block calculates the arctangent of an input value of data type ANY_REAL.

Connections and Explanations

You can find explanations for the connections of the block in the following table:
Name Data Type Explanation Default
Input IN ANY_REAL Input value 0.0
Output OUT ANY_REAL Result of function
atan(IN) in radian measure

Detailed Description
The block calculates the arc tangent of the value at the IN input. The arc tangent is the inverse function of the
restricted tangent function. The result of the arc-tangent function is available at the OUT output.

Related Topics
5.1.4 Block
5.5.9 Setting Parameters for Block Connections

160 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
 Instructions (Blocks)
10.10 Conversion

9.3 Generic Data Types

10.10 Conversion

10.10.1 ANY_TO_D

The ANY_TO_D block converts an input value of data type ANY_TYPE to type DINT.

Connections and Explanations

You can find explanations for the connections of the block in the following table:
Name Data Type Explanation Default
Input IN ANY_TYPE Input value 0.0
Output OUT DINT Output value

Related Topics
5.1.4 Block
5.5.9 Setting Parameters for Block Connections
9.3 Generic Data Types

10.10.2 ANY_TO_B

The ANY_TO_B block converts an input value of data type ANY_TYPE to type BOOL.

Connections and Explanations

You can find explanations for the connections of the block in the following table:
Name Data Type Explanation Default
Input IN ANY_TYPE Input value 0.0
Output OUT BOOL Output value

Related Topics
5.1.4 Block
5.5.9 Setting Parameters for Block Connections
9.3 Generic Data Types

10.10.3 ANY_TO_R

The ANY_TO_R block converts an input value of data type ANY_TYPE to type REAL.

Connections and Explanations

You can find explanations for the connections of the block in the following table:
Name Data Type Explanation Default
Input IN ANY_TYPE Input value 0.0
Output OUT REAL Output value

Related Topics
5.1.4 Block

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 161

, Edition 02.2022
Instructions (Blocks)
10.10 Conversion

5.5.9 Setting Parameters for Block Connections

9.3 Generic Data Types

10.10.4 ANY_TO_T

The ANY_TO_T block converts an input value of data type ANY_TYPE to type TIME.

Connections and Explanations

You can find explanations for the connections of the block in the following table:
Name Data Type Explanation Default
Input IN ANY_TYPE Input value 0.0
Output OUT TIME Output value

Related Topics
5.1.4 Block
5.5.9 Setting Parameters for Block Connections
9.3 Generic Data Types

10.10.5 ANY_TO_DW

The ANY_TO_DW block converts an input value of data type ANY_TYPE to type DWORD.

Connections and Explanations

You can find explanations for the connections of the block in the following table:
Name Data Type Explanation Default
Input IN ANY_TYPE Input value 0.0
Output OUT DWORD Output value

Related Topics
5.1.4 Block
5.5.9 Setting Parameters for Block Connections
9.3 Generic Data Types

10.10.6 SPLIT_IEC60870DT

The SPLIT_IEC60870DT block splits up a IEC60870 DateTime into its individual components.

Connections and Explanations

You can find explanations for the connections of the block in the following table:
Name Data Type Explanation Default
Input IN IEC60870DT Input value 0
Output YEAR DINT Year component of IN 2000
MONTH DINT Month component of IN 1
DAY DINT Day component of IN 1
WEEKDAY DINT Weekday component of IN 1
H DINT Hour component of IN 0
MIN DINT Minute component of IN 0

162 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
 Instructions (Blocks)
10.10 Conversion

Name Data Type Explanation Default

SEC DINT Seconds component of IN 0
MS DINT Milliseconds component of IN 0
IV BOOL Invalid component of IN 1
DST BOOL Daylight Saving Time compo- 0
nent of IN

Detailed Description
The block splits up the value at the IN into its individual components. The result of the function is available at
the different outputs.

Supported Systems
This block is supported in the CP-805x system.

Related Topics
5.1.4 Block
5.5.9 Setting Parameters for Block Connections
9.3 Generic Data Types

10.10.7 MERGE_IEC60870DT

The MERGE_IEC60870DT block combines several parts of a TimeStamp to a IEC60870 DateTime.

Connections and Explanations

You can find explanations for the connections of the block in the following table:
Name Data Type Explanation Default
Input IN IEC60870DT Input value 0
Input YEAR DINT Year component of IN 2000
MONTH DINT Month component of IN 1
DAY DINT Day component of IN 1
WEEKDAY DINT Weekday component of IN 1
H DINT Hour component of IN 0
MIN DINT Minute component of IN 0
SEC DINT Seconds component of IN 0
MS DINT Milliseconds component of IN 0
IV BOOL Invalid component of IN 1
DST BOOL Daylight Saving Time compo- 0
nent of IN
Output OUT IEC60870DT Output value

Detailed Description
The block combines different inputs to a TimeStamp to a IEC60870 DateTime. The result of the function is
available at the output.

Supported Systems
This block is supported in the CP-805x system.

Related Topics
5.1.4 Block

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 163

, Edition 02.2022
Instructions (Blocks)
10.11 Extended

5.5.9 Setting Parameters for Block Connections

9.3 Generic Data Types

10.11 Extended

10.11.1 DEADZONE_HYS

Connections and Explanations

Name Data Type Explanation Default

Inputs IN ANY_NUM Input value 0.0
X_L ANY_NUM Lower threshold value 0.0
X_M ANY_NUM Midpoint value 0.0
X_U ANY_NUM Upper threshold value 0.0
HYS ANY_NUM Hysteresis 0.0
Output OUT ANY_NUM Output value 0.0

Detailed Description
In this block the output OUT follows the input IN according to the equation of the straight line (OUT = IN),
unless the abscissa value (= input value of the block) is between the lower threshold value X_L and the upper
threshold value X_U of the dead zone. If the abscissa value is between the lower and the upper threshold
value of the dead zone, the output OUT does no longer follow the input IN according to the equation of the
straight line (OUT = IN), but the ordinate value (= output value of the block) remains equal, that is on the
value of the midpoint X_M of the dead zone (without consideration of the hysteresis). The hysteresis HYS is
always operative when the abscissa value approaches the midpoint of the dead zone. If unreasonable input
values are supplied, the lower and upper threshold values are ignored, and the equation of the straight line
(OUT = IN) is applied for the complete range. The hysteresis HYS is also ignored in case it is negative.
Functional logics:
OUT = IN if IN < X_L or IN > X_U else OUT = X_M

Marginal condition:
X_U ≥ X_M ≥ X_L
HYS < (X_U – X_M) and HYS < (X_M – X_L)

Related Topics
5.1.4 Block
5.5.9 Setting Parameters for Block Connections
9.3 Generic Data Types

10.11.2 PIDT1 Controller

The PIDT1 Controller block is used for the calculation or control of a specific control distance or size with the
help of a proportional, integral, and differential portion.

Connections and Explanations

You can find explanations for the connections of the block in the following table:

164 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
 Instructions (Blocks)
10.11 Extended

Name Data Type Explanation Default

Input DV REAL Set-point value
AV REAL Actual value
Kp REAL Gain P and I element [pu]
Kv REAL Gain D element [pu]
T1 REAL Delay time first order filter
[ms]
TN REAL Integral action time [ms]
FWD REAL Auxiliary input (feedforward
control)
VAL REAL Tracking value
(value which is led to the
limiter, instead of the PID
controller output)
TRK BOOL Tracking value enabled
(1 = switchover to VAL)
LIL REAL Lower limit of the controller
output
LIH REAL Upper limit of the controller
output
Output O REAL Controller output
P REAL Output proportional element
(P element)
I REAL Output integration element
(I element)
D REAL Output differentiation element
(D element)
L BOOL Lower limit reached
(1 = limit reached/underrun)
H BOOL Upper limit reached
(1 = limit reached/overrun)

Related Topics
5.1.4 Block
5.5.9 Setting Parameters for Block Connections
9.3 Generic Data Types

10.11.3 PT1_CONTROLLER

Connections and Explanations

Name Data Type Explanation Default

Inputs I Real Input value 0.0
KP Real Proportional gain constant 0.0
T1 Real Smoothing constant 0.0
Output OUT Real Output value 0.0

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 165

, Edition 02.2022
Instructions (Blocks)
10.11 Extended

Detailed Description
This block realizes the transfer function of a proportional element with a lag of the first order. If the values are
exceeded in either direction, the value of the output remains on the maximum or minimum value. If the
smoothing constant T1 is less than the cycle time, zero or negative, the PT1-function turns into a pure P-func-
tion.

Related Topics
5.1.4 Block
5.5.9 Setting Parameters for Block Connections
9.3 Generic Data Types

10.11.4 CONTROL_PULLUP

Connections and Explanations

Name Data Type Explanation Default

Inputs TV Real Input variable / target value 0.0
G_U Real Gradient variable – runup 0.0
G_D Real Gradient variable – return 0.0
EN_U Bool Enabling input 0
EN_D Bool Enabling input 0
QE Bool Input variable for quick equalizing 0
Outputs OUT Real Output value 0.0
EQU Bool Output variable 0

Detailed Description
This block creates an output variable at the output OUT which does not perform abrupt changes in the normal
run. The output variable OUT reaches a certain target value (= input variable TV) via preset gradients G_U and
G_D. The presetting of the gradients can be performed separately for positive (runup) and negative (return)
direction change via the gradient variables G_U and G_D. By doing so, both the gradient for the runup G_U as
well as the one for the return G_D can take either sign in certain cases. The two enabling inputs EN_U and
EN_D serve to lock or enable the runup or return. The state true of one of these inputs means enabling and
false means locking the runup or return. The input variable QE serves for the quick equalizing, i. e. abrupt
pulling up of the output variable OUT to the target value which is preset as the input variable TV. To perform a
quick equalizing this variable QE must be true. The output variable EQU gets true when the output variable
OUT has reached the target value (small hysteresis).

Related Topics
5.1.4 Block
5.5.9 Setting Parameters for Block Connections
9.3 Generic Data Types

10.11.5 Curves

The Curves block is used for the calculation of the function y = f(x, z) for families of curves by means of linear
interpolation.

Connections and Explanations

You can find explanations for the connections of the block in the following table:

166 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
 Instructions (Blocks)
10.11 Extended

Name Data Type Explanation Default

Input X REAL x value
Z REAL z value
Output Y REAL y value
ValRange BOOL If the input value for X or Z is
outside the defined curves
range, ValRange is set to TRUE.
Error BOOL If an error occurs during the
calculation of Y, Error is set to
TRUE.

Importing CSV File

The curve parameters are imported as CSV file:

[sc_assign_curve_params, 1, en_US]

The following rules apply for the CSV file:

• Delimiter is ";"

• Decimal point is "." for all languages.

If you use "," instead, it will internally be exchanged, and "." will be used for export.

• Value range for y values: -2.000.000 to 2.000.000

• Column headings are fixed; content see Curves_Template.csv

(C:\Program Files\Siemens Energy\SICAM\Device Manager\Logic Editor\Bin\Templates)

• Total number of rows (x): 2 to 20

(used numbers are 0 to 19, lines 0 and 1 must be filled)

• Total number of columns (y): 2 to 15

(used numbers are Y-Axis 00 to Y-Axis 14, columns Y-Axis 00 and Y-Axis 01 must be filled)

• x and z values must be monotonically increasing

• y values must not be empty

[sc_curves_tab1, 1, --_--]

[sc_curves_tab2, 1, --_--]

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 167

, Edition 02.2022
Instructions (Blocks)
10.11 Extended

The output behavior when exceeding the input value limits is derived from the file name:

• Suffix _KEEP
Keep last value at the output (Sample_KEEP.csv).

• Suffix _LIMIT
Set output to limit (Sample_LIMIT.csv).
If no suffix is specified, the default is LIMIT.
Case does not matter.

The name of the imported CSV file is stored in the Comment field of the Instance data of the module.

[sc_curves_comment, 1, en_US]

Exporting CSV File

You can export the imported curve parameters as CSV file again.
The file name of the import will automatically be proposed as file name for the export. A suffix will automati-
cally be added to the file name; if none has been applied, the default (_LIMIT) will be used.

Related Topics
5.1.4 Block
5.5.9 Setting Parameters for Block Connections
9.3 Generic Data Types

168 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
 Instructions (Blocks)
10.12 Target System

10.12 Target System

10.12.1 SET_DIAG_ERROR

Connections and Explanations

Name Data Type Explanation Default

Inputs State Bool 0
ID DInt 0
Text String ‘’

Detailed Description
With this module, a diagnostic bit can be set (input State = 1) or reset (input State = 0) with a user defined
text (input Text) of the class Error from the function chart. The number of diagnostic bits for the class Error is
defined by the destination system. There, diagnostic bits from 0 to 31 (input ID) are available for each
resource.

Related Topics
5.1.4 Block
5.5.9 Setting Parameters for Block Connections
9.3 Generic Data Types

10.12.2 SET_DIAG_WARNING

Connections and Explanations

Name Data Type Explanation Default

Inputs State Bool 0
ID DInt 0
Text String ‘’

Detailed Description
With this module, a diagnostic bit can be set (input State = 1) or reset (input State = 0) with a user defined
text (input Text) of the class Warning from the function chart. The number of diagnostic bits for the class
Warning is defined by the destination system. There, diagnostic bits from 0 to 31 (input ID) are available for
each resource.

Related Topics
5.1.4 Block
5.5.9 Setting Parameters for Block Connections
9.3 Generic Data Types

10.12.3 GENERAL_INTERROG_SEND

The GENERAL_INTERROG_SEND block generates a General-Interrogation message.

Connections and Explanations

You can find explanations for the connections of the block in the following table:

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 169

, Edition 02.2022
Instructions (Blocks)
10.12 Target System

Name Data Type Explanation Default

Input SEND BOOL With a rising edge at the input SEND an 0
Image-GI is generated.
CASDU1 DINT IEC 60870 Common address - CASDU1 255
CASDU2 DINT IEC 60870 Common address - CASDU2 255

Detailed Description
This block is used for generating an Image General-Interrogation message from the application program.
A rising edge at the input SEND causes an Image-GI message to be generated. CASDU1 and CASDU2 have to
be connected to inputs CASDU1 and CASDU2.
The value 255 for CASDU1 and CASDU2 means "Image-GI for all".
During Monitoring, the General-Interrogation is not generated.

Supported Systems
This block is supported in the CP-805x system.

Related Topics
5.1.4 Block
5.5.9 Setting Parameters for Block Connections
9.3 Generic Data Types

10.12.4 COUNTER_INTERROG_SEND

The COUNTER_INTERROG_SEND block generates a Counter-Interrogation message.

Connections and Explanations

You can find explanations for the connections of the block in the following table:
Name Data Type Explanation Default
Input SEND BOOL With a rising edge at the input SEND a 0
Counter Interrogation is generated.
REGION DINT System address – Region number 255
COMPONENT DINT System address – Component number 255
BSE DINT System address – Basic System Element 31
number
QCC DINT Interrogation identifier for counter request 0

Detailed Description
This block is used for generating a Counter-Interrogation message from the application program.
A rising edge at the input SEND causes a Counter Interrogation to be generated. For this, the REGION
number, COMPONENT number, BSE number, and the interrogation identifier QCC are to be established at the
respective inputs.
During Monitoring, the Counter Interrogation message is not generated.

Supported Systems
This block is supported in the CP-805x system.

Related Topics
5.1.4 Block
5.5.9 Setting Parameters for Block Connections

170 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
 Instructions (Blocks)
10.12 Target System

9.3 Generic Data Types

10.12.5 COUNTER_INTERROG_REC

The COUNTER_INTERROG_REC block evaluates a received Counter-Interrogation message.

Connections and Explanations

You can find explanations for the connections of the block in the following table:
Name Data Type Explanation Default
Input CASDU1 DINT CASDU1 of the interrogated counter value group 255
0 to 249: interrogated CASDU1
255: no selective CASDU
CASDU2 DINT CASDU1 of the interrogated counter value group 255
0 to 254: interrogated CASDU2
255: no selective CASDU
GROUP DINT Group of the interrogated counter value group 1
1 to 4: group 1 to group 4
Output TRANSMIT BOOL Transmission of the interrogated group
1 = Transmission active
FREEZE BOOL Freezing the interrogated group
1 = Freezing active
RESET BOOL Resetting the interrogated group
1 = Reset active
COT DINT Cause of Transmission of Counter-Interrogation
message TI 37

Detailed Description
This block is used for evaluating a received Counter-Interrogation message from the application program. Via
the inputs of the function block, counter interrogation messages can be filtered with the criteria explained in
the table above.
If

• CASDU1 = configured CASDU1 and CASDU2 = configured CASDU2

or

• CASDU1 = 255 and CASDU2 = 255

and

• the interrogated group represents the group of the function block,

then the output values will be set based on the values for FRZ and RQT according to the following table:

QCC: Qualifier of counter interrogation command in the message (Type Identification 101 according to
IEC 60870-5-101/104)

FRZ RQT in compatible range TRANSMIT FREEZE RESET COT

0 1 to 4 Transmit group 1 to 4 X 38 to 41
0.5 Transmit all groups (1 to 4) X 37
1 1 to 4 Freeze group 1 to 4 X
0.5 Freeze all groups (1 to 4) X
2 1 to 4 Freeze with reset group 1 to 4 X
0.5 Freeze with reset all groups (1 to 4) X

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 171

, Edition 02.2022
Instructions (Blocks)
10.12 Target System

FRZ RQT in compatible range TRANSMIT FREEZE RESET COT

3 1 to 4 Reset group 1 to 4 X
0.5 Reset all groups (1 to 4) X
FRZ RQT in private range
1 51 to 54 Freeze and transmit group 1 to 4 X X 38 to 41
55 Freeze and transmit all groups (1 to 4) X X 37
2 51 to 54 Freeze with reset and transmit group 1 to 4 X X X 38 to 41
55 Freeze with reset and transmit all groups (1 to 4) X X X 37

If values for FRZ or RQT are received which are not included in this table, the message will be discarded. In
this case, no information is transferred to the application. The output COT is only valid in combination with
the TRANSMIT signal.
During Monitoring the output values are always 0.
Cause of Transmission (COT)
<37> requested by general counter request reqcogen (all groups)
<38> requested by group 1 counter request reqco1
<39> requested by group 2 counter request reqco2
<40> requested by group 3 counter request reqco3
<41> requested by group 4 counter request reqco4

Example for the Deployment of the Block in an Application

[sc_counter_interrog_rec_example, 1, en_US]

Supported Systems
This block is supported in the CP-805x system.

Related Topics
5.1.4 Block
5.5.9 Setting Parameters for Block Connections
9.3 Generic Data Types

10.12.6 IECCMD_SET_CTRLLOC

The IECCMD_SET_CTRLLOC block enables selective control locations for the IEC command function.

172 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
 Instructions (Blocks)
10.12 Target System

Connections and Explanations

You can find explanations for the connections of the block in the following table:
Name Data Type Explanation Default
Input CTRLLOC_1 DINT Control location 1, 0 to 255 valid location, 256 = not 256
used
CTRLLOC_2 DINT Control location 2, 0 to 255 valid location, 256 = not 256
used
CTRLLOC_3 DINT Control location 3, 0 to 255 valid location, 256 = not 256
used
CTRLLOC_4 DINT Control location 4, 0 to 255 valid location, 256 = not 256
used

Detailed Description
This block allows the adjustment of the control locations for the processing of IEC commands. For each block,
up to 4 control locations can be selected at the inputs CTRLLOC_x. The control location will be moved if the
input is in the range between 0 and 255. For more than 4 control locations, the block can be used several
times. Up to 256 control locations can be selected.
If the block IECCMD_SET_CTRLLOC is not used in the application, the control-location check is disabled (i.e. all
locations are valid).
This block activates functions in the target system, i.e. during Monitoring the control location is not set.

Supported Systems
This block is supported in the CP-805x system.

Related Topics
5.1.4 Block
5.5.9 Setting Parameters for Block Connections
9.3 Generic Data Types

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 173

, Edition 02.2022
11 Documentation

11.1 Document - General 175

11.2 Text Box – General 175
11.3 Text - View 176
11.4 Printing Data 177
11.5 Using Print Preview 180

174 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
 Documentation
11.1 Document - General

11.1 Document - General

This group contains the general properties of a document template.

Elements and Explanations

The following table provides explanations of the elements of the General group.
Element Explanation

Document
Name This field contains the name of the currently selected template. You cannot change
this name.
Orientation The field tells you the orientation of the template, that is, portrait or landscape. You
cannot change the orientation.
Paper size This field shows the standardized name for the paper format of the template, for
example, Letter or A4. You cannot change this name.
Width This field contains the current template width as a numerical value. You see the
corresponding unit in the Rulers and grid group. If you select a different unit from
the Unit list box there, the value for the width will be updated.
Height This field contains the current template height as a numerical value. You see the
corresponding unit of measurement in the Rulers and grid group. If you select a
different unit of measurement from the Unit list box there, the value for the height
will also be updated.

Rulers and Grid

Units In this list box, you select a unit of measurement for the grid and the rulers. If you
select a different unit of measurement, all the values that refer to a unit of measure-
ment will be updated. These include, for example, the values in the Height and
Width fields.
Grid steps This entry field contains the value for the current grid steps. You see the corre-
sponding unit in the Units list box. If you select a different unit from this list box, the
value for the grid step will be updated. To modify the grid step, enter a value greater
than 0 in the entry field. If Centimeters is set as the unit, the maximum value is 5.
Show grid If you select this check box, a grid will be shown on the template. To hide the grid
again, remove the selection.
Snap to grid If this check box is selected, objects will be aligned on the lines of the grid when they
are moved or scaled. This function remains active if the grid is not visible.

11.2 Text Box – General

This group contains the general properties of a text box.

Elements and Explanations

The following table provides explanations of the elements of the General group.
Element Explanation

Text Box
Text Enter the text in this text box that will appear in the text box.

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 175

, Edition 02.2022
Documentation
11.3 Text - View

Element Explanation

Location and size

X/Y One position value in the X direction and one in the Y direction define the position of
a text box in the template. The position values relate to the upper left corner of the
text box.
The 2 text boxes contain the current position values. You can enter new values into
these text boxes. The position of the text box will then be updated in the template.
Conversely, the values in the text boxes will be updated as soon as you move the
text box manually.
You see the unit for the values in the Rulers and grid group. If you select a different
unit from the Unit list box there, the values for the position will also be updated.
Width/Height The width and height define the size of a text box. The 2 text boxes contain the
current values of these settings. You can enter new values into these text boxes. The
size of the text box will then be updated in the template. Conversely, the values in
the text boxes will be updated as soon as you scale the text box manually.
You see the unit for the values in the Rulers and grid group. If you select a different
unit from the Unit list box there, the values for the size will also be updated.
Z-order You can specify the sequence of the objects in this field, if the objects overlap.

11.3 Text - View

This group contains the properties of the text in a text box.

Elements and Explanations

The following table provides explanations of the elements of the Text group.
Element Explanation

Style
Font With this list box, you select a font for the text in the text box. The selected font
applies to the entire text.
Font size With this list box, you select a character size for the text in the text box. The selected
character size applies to the entire text.
Font style
Bold If you select this check box, the entire text in the text box will be shown in bold type.
Italic If you select this check box, the entire text in the text box will be shown in italics.
Underline If you select this check box, the entire text in the text box will be shown underlined.
Orientation With this list box, you select the orientation to Horizontal or Vertical for the text in
the text box.

Alignment
Horizontal With this list box, you select the horizontal alignment of the text in the text box. The
selected alignment applies to the entire text.
You see the unit for the values in the Rulers and grid group. If you select a different
unit from the Unit list box there, the values for the margins will also be updated.
Vertical With these list boxes, you select the vertical alignment of the text in the text box.
The selected alignment applies to the entire text.

176 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
 Documentation
11.4 Printing Data

11.4 Printing Data

11.4.1 Starting the Printing

Before starting the printing process, decide on one of the 3 basic possibilities:

• You want to print an individual data category, for example, the function settings or the single-line config-
uration. In this case, mark the assigned entry in the project tree. Some data categories must be displayed
in the working area. You can find more information in the respective topic descriptions.

• You want to print a number of data categories or all data from a SICAM A8000 device. In this case, mark
in the 1.1.2 Project Tree the name of the concerned SICAM A8000 device.

• You want to print a number of data categories or all data from the current project. In this case you mark
the project name in the project tree.

Starting the Printing Process for an Individual Data Category

² Open the project tree.
² Mark the affiliated entry in the project or open the data in the working area.
² Click Print in the Project menu.
The 17.4.4 Print dialog opens.
² Use this dialog to select a printer, a document layout, and the properties. You find more information
about this under 11.4.3 Selecting Print Options.
² Click Print.
The Print dialog closes, the printing progress is displayed in the object bar and the selected data is printed.

NOTE

i You can still cancel printing when it is in progress, by clicking the button in the object bar.

Starting the Printing Process for the Data from a SICAM A8000 Device or from the Project
² Open the project tree.
² Mark the project name or a device name in the project.
² Click Print in the Project menu.
The 17.4.4 Print dialog opens.
² Use this dialog to select a printer, a document layout, and the properties. You find more information
about this under 11.4.3 Selecting Print Options.
² Click Print.
The Print dialog closes, the printing progress is displayed in the object bar and the selected data is printed.

NOTE

i You can still cancel printing when it is in progress, by clicking the button in the object bar.

Related Topics
² 11.4.2 Determining the Scope of Printing

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 177

, Edition 02.2022
Documentation
11.4 Printing Data

11.4.2 Determining the Scope of Printing

If you want to print a number of data categories or all data from a SICAM A8000 device or from the project,
you can determine the scope of printing. For this, you can use the dialog 17.4.4 Print. This dialog is displayed
when you mark the project name or a device name in the 1.1.2 Project Tree and then click Print in the Project
menu.

Determining the Scope of Printing for Project Data

² Click Options in the Logic Editor toolbar.
The context menu opens.
² Select Settings from the context menu.
The Settings editor is displayed in the working area.
² Select 11.4.4 Print Options in this editor.
The print options are displayed under the Select print contents area.
² The Select print contents area contains the names of the individual data categories. Select at least one
data category. To do this, mark the relevant check box.
² You can optionally select other data categories. In order to select all data categories, click Select all.
² Click Save Project.
The scope for printing for project data is determined

Related Topics
² 11.4.3 Selecting Print Options
² 11.4.4 Print Options

11.4.3 Selecting Print Options

Before the printout is started, select a printer, a document template and a cover page. For this, you can use
the dialog 17.4.4 Print.
This dialog is displayed after one of the following actions:

• You have marked an individual data category in the project tree or opened the data in the working area
and then clicked Print in the Project menu.

• You have predefined the scope of printing and then clicked Print button from the Logic Editor toolbar.

• You have predefined the print options in the 11.4.4 Print Options and then clicked Print button from the
Logic Editor toolbar.

Setting up Printer and Document

² Select the printer from the Name list box that should be used for the printout. The names of all output
devices are displayed for which the affiliated drivers are installed.
² You can optionally click Advanced. Windows standard dialog for Print is displayed. With this dialog, you
can set up other print-specific settings or open other dialogs.
² Select the document layout. In order to do so, click the Document information list box.
An additional selection dialog is displayed.
² The template-list box contains the templates available for the selected category. The name, paper type,
and orientation are displayed for every template.
² Mark the desired template in this list.
²
Click .

178 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
 Documentation
11.4 Printing Data

The additional selection dialog closes.

² Select a check box option Print cover page to print the cover page, which is stored in the selected docu-
ment information.
² Select a check box option Print table of contents to add a table of contents to the printout.
² Under Properties area, select the option All if you wish to print out the entire content of the editor.
- or -
² Select Compact if you wish to print out an abbreviated version of the project data.
² Click Preview to generate a print preview in advance.
A print preview is displayed in the working area.
² Click Print.
The Print dialog closes and the selected data is printed.

NOTE

i The scope of print options available in the Print dialog vary depending on the elements to be printed.

Related Topics
² 11.4.4 Print Options
² 11.4.1 Starting the Printing

11.4.4 Print Options

You can use this group to select print contents.

Elements and Explanations

The following table provides explanations for the elements of the Print options group.
Element Explanation
Select all If you mark this check box, all the options in the Select print contents
group are selected for printing.
Device information If you mark this check box, the contents of this field are selected for
Hardware and protocols printing.
Measuring-points routing Note: On selecting the check-box option User comments, the
comments entered for functions and signals in different devices (for
Function-group connections
example, comments in the AomBay, Function group (FG), Function
Information routing (FN), Function block (FB), Signals, and Settings) are printed and
Communication mapping displayed in the PDF format.
Settings
Function charts
Display pages
Safety and security
Merging-unit routing
User comments

Related Topics
11.4.2 Determining the Scope of Printing
11.4.3 Selecting Print Options

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 179

, Edition 02.2022
Documentation
11.5 Using Print Preview

11.5 Using Print Preview

11.5.1 Overview of the Print Preview

Before printing, you can check the expected print result with 17.4.3 Print Preview.
The print preview offers the following possibilities:

• You can scale the view of the displayed document.

• You can navigate in the document in different ways.

• You can start the document print directly from the print preview.

Related Topics
11.5.2 Opening the Print Preview
11.5.4 Scaling a View
11.5.5 Navigating in the Print Preview
11.4.1 Starting the Printing

11.5.2 Opening the Print Preview

Before opening 17.4.3 Print Preview, you must decide on one of the 3 basic possibilities:

• Use the print preview to check an individual data category, for example, the function settings or the
single-line configuration. In this case, you mark the assigned entry in the project tree. In the case of a few
data categories it is necessary to have the data displayed in the working area. More information about
this can be found in the respective topic descriptions in this Help.

• You want to check a number of data categories or all data from a SICAM A8000 device with the print
preview. In this case you mark the name of the SICAM A8000 device concerned in the project tree.

• You want to check a number of data categories or all data from the current project with the print
preview. In this case you mark the project name in the project tree.

Checking Individual Data Categories with the Print Preview

² Mark the assigned entry in the 1.1.2 Project Tree or open the data in the working area.
² Click Print preview in the Project menu.
The 17.4.3 Print Preview dialog opens.
² Use this dialog to select a document layout and the properties. You find more information about this
under 11.5.3 Selecting Preview Options.
² Click Preview.
The Print preview dialog closes. The print preview is displayed in the working area.

Checking the Data from a SICAM A8000 Device or the Project with the Print Preview
² Mark the project name or a device name in the project tree.
² Click Print Preview in the Project menu.
The 17.4.3 Print Preview dialog opens.
² Use this dialog to select the document layout and the properties. You find more information about this
under 11.5.3 Selecting Preview Options.
² Click Preview.
The Print preview dialog closes. The print preview is displayed in the working area.

180 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
 Documentation
11.5 Using Print Preview

Related Topics
² 11.5.1 Overview of the Print Preview
² 11.5.4 Scaling a View
² 11.5.5 Navigating in the Print Preview

11.5.3 Selecting Preview Options

Before the print preview is started, select the document layout and the properties. For this, you can use the
dialog 17.4.3 Print Preview.
This dialog is displayed after one of the following actions:

• You have marked an individual data category in the project tree and then clicked Print preview in the
Project menu.

• You have marked the data in the working area and then clicked Preview in the Project menu.

• You have predefined the preview scope with the dialog 17.4.3 Print Preview and then clicked Preview.

Setting up a Document for Print Preview

² Click Print preview in the Project menu.
The 17.4.3 Print Preview dialog opens.
² Select a document information template for the print preview. In order to do so, click the Document
information list box.
An additional selection dialog is displayed.
² The template-list box contains the templates available for the selected category. The name, paper type,
and orientation are displayed for every template.
² Mark the desired template in this list.
²
Click .

The additional selection dialog closes.

² Select a check box option Print cover page to print the cover page, which is stored in the selected docu-
ment information.
² Select a check box option Print table of contents to add a table of contents to the printout.
² Under Properties area, select the option All if you wish to print all configuration data of the selected
objects..
- or -
² Select Compact if you wish to print out an abbreviated version of the project data.
² Click Preview.
The Print preview dialog closes. The print preview is displayed in the working area.

Related Topics
² 11.5.1 Overview of the Print Preview

11.5.4 Scaling a View

You can scale the view of the 17.4.3 Print Preview and thus change the display size of the document.

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 181

, Edition 02.2022
Documentation
11.5 Using Print Preview

You have the following possibilities:

• You can scale the view in predefined steps.

• You can enlarge a rectangular segment of the view.

• You can dynamically scale the view.

• You can scale the view on a percentage basis.

• You can select one defined final state.

NOTE

i An enlarged or smaller view has no influence on the print result.

Scaling a View in the Predefined Steps

²
Click one of the 2 buttons or .

The document is displayed larger or smaller.

NOTE

i When the maximum or minimum display size is reached, the respective button becomes inactive.

Enlarging a Rectangular Segment of the View

²
Click the button in the Print preview toolbar.

This enables the selection tool.

² Left-click on the document and hold the mouse button down as you drag a rectangle.
² Release the mouse button as soon as the rectangle has reached the desired size.
The marked segment in the document will be enlarged in the working area.

Scaling a View Dynamically

²
Click the button in the Print preview toolbar.

This enables the tool for dynamic scaling.

² Left-click on the document and hold the mouse button. If you want to make the document smaller, move
the mouse towards you. If you want to make the document larger, move the mouse away from you.
The document is enlarged or made smaller in the print preview.
² Release the mouse button as soon as the document has reached the desired size.
The document is displayed in the print preview in the selected size.

Scaling a View by Percent

² Open the list box for the scaling factor in the Print preview toolbar.
² Select a percent value.
- or -
² Enter a whole number percent value from 10 to 800 into the text box of the list box.
² Click outside of the text box.
- or -

182 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
 Documentation
11.5 Using Print Preview

² Press the <Enter> button.

The document will be displayed in the selected or entered percent size.

Selecting a Defined Final State

² Open the list box for the scaling factor in the Print preview toolbar.
² Select one of the defined final states.
The document is displayed in the desired final state.

Related Topics
² 11.5.1 Overview of the Print Preview

11.5.5 Navigating in the Print Preview

In order to get from one page of the document to the next, you have the following possibilities:

• You can display a certain page directly.

• You can display the previous or next page.

• You can display the previous or next view.

• You can move the pages vertically with the scroll bar.

• You can move the pages vertically with the hand tool.

NOTE

i Please observe the difference between the previous/next page and the previous/next view. For pages, the
terms Previous and Next relate to the 2 bordering pages that are located before and after the currently
visible page. With views, the terms relate to the previous display process. If you navigate through a docu-
ment, the sequence of the displayed pages is documented in a list. With the Previous view and Next view
actions, you can navigate within this list and display the corresponding pages.

Displaying the Previous or the Next Page

²
In order to display the previous page, click the button in the Print preview toolbar.

- or -
²
In order to display the 1st page of the document, click the button in the Print preview toolbar.

- or -
²
In order to display the next page of the document, click the button in the Print preview toolbar.

- or -
²
In order to display the last page of the document, click the button in the Print preview toolbar.

Corresponding with your respective action, the appropriate page is displayed in the print preview.

Displaying the Previous or the Next View

²
In order to display the previous view, click the button in the Print preview toolbar.

- or -

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 183

, Edition 02.2022
Documentation
11.5 Using Print Preview

²
In order to display the next view, click the button in the Print preview toolbar.

Corresponding with your respective action, the appropriate page is displayed in the print preview.

Moving Pages Vertically with the Scroll Bar

² Click on the vertical scroll bar in the display area and hold the mouse button.
² Move the scroll bar in a vertical direction.
The document is moved corresponding to your movement in the display area.

Moving Pages Vertically with the Hand Tool

²
Click the button in the Print preview toolbar.

The button in the toolbar is marked and the mouse pointer changes into a hand symbol.
² Click on the document in the display area and hold the mouse button.
² Move the document in a vertical direction.

Related Topics
² 11.5.1 Overview of the Print Preview

11.5.6 Starting the Printout

If you are satisfied with the expected print result, you can start the printout. Before the document is printed,
select a printer.

Starting a Printout and Selecting a Printer

²
Click the button.

The 17.4.4 Print dialog opens.

² Select the printer from the Name list box that should be used for the printout. The list contains the
names of all output devices for which the respective drivers are installed.
² You can optionally click Advanced. The Windows standard dialog for Print is displayed. With this dialog,
you can set up other print-specific settings or open other dialogs.
² Click Print.
The Print dialog closes and the selected data is printed.

Related Topics
² 11.5.1 Overview of the Print Preview
² 11.4.3 Selecting Print Options

184 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
12 Project

12.1 User Information 186

12.2 Project Conversion 186

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 185

, Edition 02.2022
Project
12.1 User Information

12.1 User Information

This group contains information about the user.

Elements and Explanations

The following table provides explanations of the elements of the User information group.
Element Explanation
Author This field contains the user name by which the creator of the object was logged on to
the Logic Editor. You cannot change this name.
Created time This field contains the date on which the object was created. You cannot change this
date.
Last modified by This field contains the user name by which you are logged on to the Logic Editor
when the change was made. You cannot change this name.
Modification time This field contains the date on which the object was modified. You cannot change this
date directly. It changes as soon as you modify the object again.
Comment Enter a comment for the object into this text box.

Related Topics
3.1.1 Overview of Projects

12.2 Project Conversion

The following conversions have been added:

• V03.60 to V03.70:
For XOR blocks (BOOL and DWORD), the inputs of X1/X2 are renamed to IN1 and IN2.

186 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
13 Function Charts (CFC)

13.1 Function Chart – General 188

13.2 Time Stamp 188
13.3 Sheet Bars/Layout 189
13.4 Advanced 190
13.5 Text Box – General 190
13.6 Text Box – Background 190
13.7 Text 191
13.8 Block – General Properties 191
13.9 Interface 192
13.10 Invisible Interconnections 193
13.11 Terminal – General 194
13.12 Interconnection 196
13.13 Signal – General 196

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 187

, Edition 02.2022
Function Charts (CFC)
13.1 Function Chart – General

13.1 Function Chart – General

This group contains the general properties of a function chart (CFC).

Elements and Explanations

The following table provides explanations of the elements of the General group.
Element Explanation
Name This text box contains the current name of the function-block diagram. Enter another
name for the function-block diagram if necessary. If you change the name in the text
box, the name also changes in the project tree.
Type This field contains the type of the function-block diagram. The type is permanently
set as CFC.
Comment If you entered a comment when the function-block diagram was added, this will be
shown in this text box. You can change the comment.
Version If you entered a version number when the function-block diagram was added, this
will be shown in this entry field. You can change this version number.
Author If you entered the name of an author when the function-block diagram was added,
this will be shown in this text box. You can modify the name of the author.
Optimize chart If you highlight this check box, the function-block diagram will be included in the
automatic optimization.

Related Topics
5.1.1 Meaning of CFC
5.1.3 Function Chart
5.2.3 Renaming a Function Chart (CFC)
5.1.6 Flow Model
5.7.2 Optimizing the Running Sequence Automatically

13.2 Time Stamp

This group contains information about the timestamp of a function chart (CFC).

Elements and Explanations

The following table provides explanations of the elements of the Time stamp group.
Element Explanation
Created on This field contains the date on which the function-block diagram was created. You
cannot change this date.
Changed on This field contains the date on which the function-block diagram was modified. You
cannot change this date directly. This data changes as soon as you save the function-
block diagram again.
Changed by This field contains the user name by which you are logged on to the operating system
when the change was made. You cannot change this name.

Related Topics
5.1.1 Meaning of CFC
5.1.3 Function Chart

188 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
 Function Charts (CFC)
13.3 Sheet Bars/Layout

13.3 Sheet Bars/Layout

This group contains the properties of sheet bars and the layout of a function chart (CFC).

Elements and Explanations

The following table provides explanations of the elements of the Sheet Bars/layout group.
Element Explanation

Sheet Bars
Static sheet bars If you select this option, a permanent area will be
reserved in the function-block diagram on the right
and left. This area is exclusively for sheet-bar entries,
for example for interconnections throughout the
function-block diagram.
Dynamic sheet bars If you select this option, the sheet-bar entries will
only be shown in the function-block diagram when
necessary.
A function-block diagram configured in this way
differs from a function-block diagram with fixed sheet
bars by way of the following properties:

• You can place blocks or text boxes in the sheet-

bar area.
• The sheet-bar area is not marked.
No sheet bars If you select this option, the function-block diagram
will be displayed without margin bars. Instead, so-
called connectors show the interconnections to other
function-block diagrams or to operands. The connec-
tors are placed next to the interconnected block
connection. Cross-sheet interconnections are
displayed as if they are on one sheet.
Sheet-bar size With this list box, you set the width of the sheet bars.
This is done by clicking the arrow buttons of the list
box. Alternately, you can enter a value in the entry
field of the list box.

Layout
Vertical With this list box, you increase or reduce the number
of sheets of the function-block diagram in the vertical
direction. This is done by clicking the arrow buttons
of the list box. Alternatively, you can enter a value in
the entry field of the list box.
Horizontal With this list box, you increase or reduce the number
of sheets of the function-block diagram in the hori-
zontal direction. This is done by clicking the arrow
buttons of the list box. Alternatively, you can enter a
value in the entry field of the list box.
Sheet size With this list box, you select a sheet size. You can
select between the formats A3, A4, and A5.

Related Topics
5.1.1 Meaning of CFC
5.1.3 Function Chart
5.3.3 Overview of Sheet Bars

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 189

, Edition 02.2022
Function Charts (CFC)
13.4 Advanced

5.3.1 Adjusting the Layout in the CFC Data Flow View

13.4 Advanced
This group provides advanced properties for a function chart (CFC).

Elements and Explanations

The following table provides explanations of the elements of the Advanced group.
Element Explanation
Code generation Shows if the current chart is considered for the code generation (yes, if activated).
You can only de/activate this option via the context menu of the chart in the
1.1.2 Project Tree.
Depending on this setting, the icon of the chart differs in the Project Tree:

• Code generation active:

• Code generation inactive:

Related Topics
5.1.1 Meaning of CFC
5.4.5 Adding and Editing a Text Box in a CFC in the Data Flow View

13.5 Text Box – General

This group contains the general properties of a text box in a function chart (CFC).

Elements and Explanations

The following table provides explanations of the elements of the General group.
Element Explanation
Text block in the If you select this check box, the text block will be moved into the background. You
background can then position interconnections and blocks through the text box.

Border
Border width This entry field contains the current line width in pixels. The default value after inser-
tion of the text box is 0. To modify the width of the line, enter a value in the entry
field.
Border color With this list box, you can select a color for the border line.

Related Topics
5.1.1 Meaning of CFC
5.4.5 Adding and Editing a Text Box in a CFC in the Data Flow View

13.6 Text Box – Background

This group contains the background properties of a text box in a function chart (CFC).

190 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
 Function Charts (CFC)
13.7 Text

Elements and Explanations

The following table provides explanations of the elements of the Background group.
Element Explanation
Background image Here you can select a background image to be used as background of the text box.
Background color With this list box, you select a filling color for the text box.
Gamma value Here you can select the gamma value for a used background image.

Related Topics
5.1.1 Meaning of CFC
5.4.5 Adding and Editing a Text Box in a CFC in the Data Flow View

13.7 Text
This group contains the text properties of a text box in a function chart (CFC).

Elements and Explanations

The following table provides explanations of the elements of the Text group.
Element Explanation
Text Enter the text in this text box that will appear in the text box.
Font With this list box, you select a font for the text in the text box. The selected font
applies to the entire text.
Text color With this list box, you select a color for the text in the text box. The selected text color
applies to the entire text.
Alignment With this list box, you select an alignment of the text in the text box. The selected
orientation applies to the entire text.
Font size With this list box, you select a character size for the text in the text box. The selected
character size applies to the entire text.
Wrap lines automati- If this check box is selected, the text will be broken into lines depending on the width
cally of the text box. If the check box is not selected, the text will be truncated if the text
box is too narrow.

Related Topics
5.1.1 Meaning of CFC
5.4.5 Adding and Editing a Text Box in a CFC in the Data Flow View

13.8 Block – General Properties

This group contains the general properties of a block in a function chart (CFC).

Elements and Explanations

The following table provides explanations of the elements of the General group.
Element Explanation

Instance Data
Name This text box contains a consecutively numbered default name for the block instance.
Enter another name for the block instance if necessary.
Comment You have the option of entering a comment in this text box.

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 191

, Edition 02.2022
Function Charts (CFC)
13.9 Interface

Element Explanation
Add forcing This column contains 1 check box. If you select this check box in the offline mode, a
force value can be added to the block IO in the online mode. This check box has to be
selected before starting the online analysis.
Forcing active This column contains 1 check box. If you select this check box in the online mode, the
force value will be written to the device.
Force value This column contains 1 field. This field contains the value that is written to the device
when forcing is activated.

Type Data
Type This field contains the type of the block, for example, AND. You cannot change this
block type.
Comment This field contains a comment about the block that has been preset in the factory. You
cannot change this comment.
Author This field contains the user name by which you are logged on to the operating system
when the insertion was made. You cannot change this name.
Version This field contains a version number of the block that has been preset in the factory.
You cannot change this version number.
Family With this field you can structure function blocks.
Created on This field contains the date on which the block was inserted into the function-block
diagram. You cannot change this date.
Changed by This field contains the user name by which you are logged on to the operating system
when the change was made. You cannot change this name.
Call (Type) Type of the used function block.

Related Topics
5.1.1 Meaning of CFC
5.1.4 Block
5.4.1 Basic Instructions

13.9 Interface
This group contains the terminals properties of a component in a function chart (CFC).

Elements and Explanations

The following table provides explanations of the elements of the Connections group.
Element Explanation
Name This column contains the names of all block connections. You cannot change these
names.
Value This column contains the current values of all block connections. You can change
these values. Click the entry field in question and enter a new value. A plausibility and
syntax verification checks the value. If the value is permissible, it is accepted. Other-
wise, you will receive a warning.
The value will be synchronized with the value in the properties of the block connec-
tion. The values in the 2 text boxes are therefore always identical.
Unit This column contains the units currently set for the block connections. You can
change these units. This is done by clicking the cell in question. The cell changes into
a list box. Select a new unit for the block connection from the list box.
The unit will be synchronized with the unit in the properties of the block connection.
The selected units are therefore always identical.

192 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
 Function Charts (CFC)
13.10 Invisible Interconnections

Element Explanation
Type This column contains the data types for the inputs and outputs of the block. You
cannot change these data types.
The following data types are possible: BOOL, DINT, REAL, TIME, STRUCT.
Add forcing This column contains 1 check box for each input and output. If you select this check
box in the offline mode, a force value can be added to the block IO in the online
mode. This check box has to be selected before starting the online analysis.
Forcing active This column contains 1 check box for each input and output. If you select this check
box in the online mode, the force value will be written to the device.
Force value This column contains 1 field for each input and output. This field contains the value
that is written to the device when forcing is activated.
Section This column contains the information for each connection as to whether it is an input
or an output. You cannot change this information.
Invisible This column contains 1 check box for each block connection. If you select this check
box, the connection will be hidden on the block. To show the block connection again,
remove the selection.
The check box will be synchronized with the check box in the properties of the block
connection. The conditions of the 2 check boxes are therefore always identical.
For test This column contains one check box for each block connection. If you select this check
box, the connection will be taken into account for function chart analysis.
The check box will be synchronized with the check box in the properties of the block
connection. The conditions of the 2 check boxes are therefore always identical.
Comment This column contains 1 text box for each connection. You have the option of entering
a comment in this text box.
The comment will be synchronized with the comment in the properties of the block
connection. The contents of the 2 text boxes are therefore always identical.
Comment (type) This field contains a comment preset in the factory. You cannot change this comment.

Related Topics
5.1.1 Meaning of CFC
5.1.4 Block
5.5.8 Showing/Hiding Block Connections
5.5.9 Setting Parameters for Block Connections

13.10 Invisible Interconnections

This group contains the general properties of invisible interconnections in a function chart (CFC).

Elements and Explanations

The following table provides explanations of the elements of the Invisible Interconnections group.
Element Explanation
Name This column contains the names of all invisible block connections. You cannot change
these names.
Interconnection This column contains invisible interconnections as text. For this purpose, the names of
the function-block diagram, block, and connection of the interconnected partner are
combined into an expression having the form:
Plan name\block name.connection name. An example of this is
CFC_Chart_3\AND_1.Y.
Invisible This column contains one check box for each invisible interconnection. Because the
interconnection is hidden, the check box is selected. To show the interconnection
again, remove the selection.

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 193

, Edition 02.2022
Function Charts (CFC)
13.11 Terminal – General

Element Explanation
Type This column contains the data types for the inputs and outputs of the block. You
cannot change these data types. The following data types are possible: BOOL, DINT,
INT, REAL.
Section This column contains the information for each connection as to whether it is an input
or an output. You cannot change this information.
Comment This column contains one text box for each connection. You have the option of
entering a comment in this text box.
The comment will be synchronized with the comment in the properties of the block
connection. The contents of the 2 text boxes are therefore always identical.
Comment (type) This field contains a comment preset in the factory. You cannot change this comment.

Related Topics
5.1.1 Meaning of CFC
5.1.4 Block

13.11 Terminal – General

This group contains the general properties of a block connection in a function chart (CFC).

Elements and Explanations

The following table provides explanations of the elements of the General group.
Element Explanation

Instance Data
Name This field contains the name of the block connection. You cannot change this name.
Value This entry field contains the current value of the block connection. You can change
this value. Click the entry field and enter a new value. A plausibility and syntax verifi-
cation checks the value. If the value is permissible, it is accepted. Otherwise, you will
receive a warning.
The value will be synchronized with the value in the properties of the block connec-
tion. The values in the 2 entry fields are therefore always identical.
To the right of the entry field, there is a check box. If the value entered is valid, the
selection of the check box will automatically be removed. If you select the check box
again, the value of the block connection will be reset to the default value. The Value
field in the Type data area shows the default value of the block connection.
Unit With this list box, you can select a unit for the block connection. The unit will be
synchronized with the unit in the properties of the block connection. The selected
units are therefore always identical.
To the right of the list box, there is a check box. As soon as you select a unit, the
selection of the check box will automatically be removed. If you select the check box
again, the unit of the block connection will be reset to the default unit. The Unit field
in the Type data area shows the default value of the block connection.
Invisible If you select this check box, the block connection will be hidden on the block. To
show the block connection again, remove the selection.
The check box will be synchronized with the check box in the connection properties
of the block. The conditions of the 2 check boxes are therefore always identical. The
Invisible check box in the Type data area shows the default value of the block
connection.

194 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
 Function Charts (CFC)
13.11 Terminal – General

Element Explanation
For test If you select this check box, the block connection will be taken into account for func-
tion chart analysis.
The check box will be synchronized with the check box in the connection properties
of the block. The conditions of the 2 check boxes are therefore always identical. The
For test check box in the Type data area shows the default value of the block
connection.
Comment You have the option of entering a comment in this text box.
The comment will be synchronized with the comment in the connection properties
of the block. The contents of the 2 text boxes are therefore always identical.

Type Data
Type This field contains the data type of the block connection. The following data types
are possible: BOOL, DINT, REAL, TIME, STRUCT.
Value This field contains the default value of the block connection.
If you insert a block into a function-block diagram, the block connection will be
preset to the default value for the connection type. If the default value of the
connection type changes, it will propagate the new value to the block connection in
the function-block diagram.
If you set parameters for the block connections, propagation of the standard value to
the connection type will be interrupted. You can reactivate the propagation. This
requires that you select the check box next to the Value field. The standard value of
the connection instance then replaces the parameterized value again.
Unit This field contains the default unit of the block connection.
If you insert a block into a function-block diagram, the block connection will be
preset to the default unit for the connection type. If the default unit of the connec-
tion type changes, it will propagate the new unit to the block connection in the func-
tion-block diagram.
If you set parameters for the block connections, propagation of the standard unit to
the connection type will be interrupted. You can reactivate the propagation. This
requires that you select the check box next to the Unit field. The standard value of
the connection instance then replaces the parameterized value again.
Invisible The state of this check box indicates the default setting for the visibility of the block
connection.
For test The state of this check box indicates the default setting for the test of the block
connection.
Comment This field contains a comment about the block connection that has been preset in
the factory.
Configurable The state of this check box indicates the default setting for the parameterizability of
the block connection.
Interconnectable The state of this check box indicates the default setting for the interconnectability of
the block connection.
Section This field contains the information as to whether the block connection is an input or
an output.

Related Topics
5.1.1 Meaning of CFC
5.1.4 Block
5.5.9 Setting Parameters for Block Connections

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 195

, Edition 02.2022
Function Charts (CFC)
13.12 Interconnection

13.12 Interconnection
This group contains the general properties of an interconnection in a function chart (CFC).

Elements and Explanations

The following table provides explanations of the elements of the Interconnection group.
Element Explanation
Source This field contains the source of an interconnection as text. For this purpose, the names of the
function-block diagram, block, and connection of the source are combined into an expression
having the form:
Plan name\block name.connection name. An example for this is Chart_3\AND_1.Y.
Target This field contains the target of an interconnection as text. For this purpose, the names of the
function-block diagram, block, and connection of the target are combined into an expression
having the form:
Plan name\block name.connection name. An example for this is Chart_4\OR_2.X1.
Negate If you select this check box, the target input of the interconnection will be negated. The check
box is only active if the target input is of type BOOL.

Related Topics
5.1.1 Meaning of CFC
5.5.1 Displaying Interconnections
5.5.4 Negating a Block Input

13.13 Signal – General

This group contains the general properties of a signal.

Elements and Explanations

The following table provides explanations of the elements of the General group.
Element Explanation
General
Name Contains the path of the signal in the form [SignalName].[SignalElement]. For
changing the signal name refer to the manual of the SICAM Device Manager.
Type The type of the signal (BOOL, DINT, REAL, TIME, STRUCT).
Comment Displays a comment, if available.
Variable
Value The default value of the signal.
Const True if a variable has been defined as constant and cannot be changed.
Retain True if the variable has to be created in the battery-buffered area of the control, so it
does not lose its values after power failure.
Signal
Signal The name of the signal (refer to SICAM Device Manager for further help).
Address The address of the signal.
TI Type information of the signal.
Attribute The attribute name of the signal element.

Related Topics
5.1.1 Meaning of CFC

196 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
 Function Charts (CFC)
13.13 Signal – General

5.5.3 Interconnecting a Block with a Signal

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 197

, Edition 02.2022
14 Analyzing Function Charts (CFC)

14.1 Analyzing Function Charts (CFC) 199

198 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
 Analyzing Function Charts (CFC)
14.1 Analyzing Function Charts (CFC)

14.1 Analyzing Function Charts (CFC)

Function charts (CFC) analysis in Logic Editor allows you to verify the created CFC logic for the A8000 series
devices. Using this feature, you can watch the values available at respective inputs and/or output of the
configured CFC blocks. You can analyze the CFC charts via Online analysis (Monitoring) or via Offline anal-
ysis (Simulation).

[sc_le_cfc-analysis_sample_view, 1, en_US]

Figure 14-1 CFC Analysis - Sample View

Online Analysis of Function Charts (CFC) - Monitoring

With the CFC online analysis, you can verify the configured CFC logic in Logic Editor by connecting to the
A8000 series device. You can view real-time values or states of any inputs/outputs of the CFC blocks. This is a
continuous process and you can stop the operation at any point of time.
Prerequisites:

• This analysis can be performed on all A8000 series devices.

• The device must be running.

• Logic Editor must be able to connect to the device as guest or administrator user. Also consider the limi-
tation of the amount of logged on users to the device.

• The configuration must be loaded to the device before starting the Online analysis.
² In the project tree of an offline configuration, open any configured function chart (CFC) and select any
CFC block which needs to be analyzed.
² Select the For Test option of the input/output variable to watch its runtime value in the following ways:
You can select the individual terminal and select the option For Test under the General group in the
Properties tab.
You can select the entire block and select the option For Test under the Interface group in the Proper-
ties tab.

NOTE

i During runtime of online analysis, you still can add or remove terminals for test as well as probe a terminal
by positioning the mouse pointer over the terminal.

² Open the configured CFC chart.

² To start CFC online analysis (Monitoring), click the symbol in the menu bar of the plan.

The Online test of function charts window displays the progress status and after completion, the values for
input/output terminals are displayed in the working area. The title bar changes to orange color indicating that

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 199

, Edition 02.2022
Analyzing Function Charts (CFC)
14.1 Analyzing Function Charts (CFC)

the editor is in the online mode. The real-time values from the device are displayed at the terminals continu-
ously until you stop the analysis.

NOTE

i While the CFC online analysis is in progress, you can still add or remove the terminals for the online analysis
and view the values available at the terminal. Other CFC operations, like creating a new logic and modifica-
tion of any existing logic, are not possible while CFC online analysis is in progress.

² Click the Control flow tab to add/remove values for watching and also watch the values for already
added terminals in the tabular view.

² To stop the CFC online analysis, click the symbol in the menu bar again or select Stop function chart
(CFC) analysis from the Tools menu.

Offline Analysis of Function Charts (CFC) - Simulation

With the CFC offline analysis, you can verify the configured CFC logic in Logic Editor without connecting to the
A8000 series device. You can view values or states of any inputs/outputs of the CFC blocks. This is a contin-
uous process and you can stop the operation at any point of time.
² In the project tree of an offline configuration, open any configured function chart (CFC) and select any
CFC block which needs to be analyzed.
² Select the For Test option of the input/output variable to watch its runtime value in the following ways:
You can select the individual terminal and select the option For Test under the General group in the
Properties tab.
You can select the entire block and select the option For Test under the Interface group in the Proper-
ties tab.

NOTE

i During runtime of offline analysis, you still can add or remove terminals for test as well as probe a terminal
by positioning the mouse pointer over the terminal.

² Open the configured CFC chart.

² To start CFC offline analysis (Simulation), click the symbol in the menu bar of the plan.

The Starting simulation... dialog displays the progress status and after completion, the values for input/
output terminals are displayed in the working area. The title bar changes to orange color indicating that the
editor is in the offline mode. The values are displayed at the terminals continuously until you stop the analysis.
² To stop the CFC offline analysis, click the symbol in the menu bar again.

200 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
 Analyzing Function Charts (CFC)
14.1 Analyzing Function Charts (CFC)

Related Topics
² 5.1.1 Meaning of CFC
² 5.1.3 Function Chart
² 5.1.5 Configuration Strategy
² 5.2.1 Adding a CFC
² 5.2.2 Opening a CFC

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 201

, Edition 02.2022
15 SICAM A8000 Devices

15.1 Configuring SICAM A8000 Devices 203

15.2 Testing SICAM A8000 Devices 205

202 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
 SICAM A8000 Devices
15.1 Configuring SICAM A8000 Devices

15.1 Configuring SICAM A8000 Devices

15.1.1 SICAM CP-8000, CP-8021, CP-8022

Task Assignment
² In the Project Tree, double-click Add new chart.
The Add new chart dialog opens.

The Task Assignment cannot be changed, there is only 1 fixed task level.

Task Cycle-Time
² In the Project Tree, double-click Chart sequence & extras.
² Switch to the Task assignment tab and select the task. In the corresponding Properties tab below, set
the Cycle Time.

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 203

, Edition 02.2022
SICAM A8000 Devices
15.1 Configuring SICAM A8000 Devices

Related Topics
² 5.1.6 Flow Model
² 5.1.3 Function Chart

15.1.2 SICAM CP-8050, CP-8031

Task Assignment

NOTE

i With V03.50 and higher it is also possible to set up a device of type CP-8031 in the Device Manager.
A CP-8031 is basically a CP-8050 with some restrictions (e.g. no multiple resources and redundancy).

² In the Project Tree, double-click Add new chart.

The Add new chart dialog opens.

In the Task assignment, there are 3 task levels available. When you create the chart you can assign the
desired task level.
Additionally, the Task assignment can also be changed later in the 17.1.1 Function-Chart (CFC) Editor.

204 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
 SICAM A8000 Devices
15.2 Testing SICAM A8000 Devices

Task Properties
² In the Project Tree, double-click Chart sequence & extras.
² Switch to the Task assignment tab and select the task. In the corresponding Properties tab below, set
the Cycle Time.

² Set the Time-out monitoring of task execution.

If the task is not finished within the given cycles, the application and all I/O modules are terminated.
² Set the Program processing.
– Periodic:
The program processing is periodically executed according to the Cycle Time.
– Spontaneous or periodic:
The program processing is periodically executed according to the Cycle Time. However, after receiving a
spontaneous message, the execution starts immediately.

Related Topics
² 5.1.6 Flow Model
² 5.1.3 Function Chart
² 5.8.3 Bumpless Reload

15.2 Testing SICAM A8000 Devices

15.2.1 Testing Signals (Forcing)

Forcing is a user intervention in the logic of the simulated program by changing the value of a variable.

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 205

, Edition 02.2022
SICAM A8000 Devices
15.2 Testing SICAM A8000 Devices

Adding Signals For Test

In order to add input and output signals from the plan for test, you have 2 possibilities:

• Right-click a single signal and select Add for test from the context menu to add this single signal.

• Right-click anywhere in the plan and select Add all input signals of this chart to forcing list or Add all
output signals of this chart to forcing list from the context menu to add all input or output signals at
once.

Forcing Table
The forcing table is available in the Testing taskcard.
The forcing table is a central point in Logic Editor to influence the execution of the CFC plan. The force list
shows all signals which are added to the list and can be used for forcing.
Within the table you can:

• modify the value that is to be forced

• activate the forcing

• disconnect the signal from the process bus

206 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
 SICAM A8000 Devices
15.2 Testing SICAM A8000 Devices

[sc_le_forcingtable, 2, en_US]

Figure 15-1 Adding a signal to the Forcing Table

Adding a Signal to the Forcing Table

To add a signal to the forcing table:
² Click the symbol between Process value and Chart value of the desired signal.

The symbol changes to . You can now edit the Chart value of each value of the selected signal and they are
now visible in the forcing list.

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 207

, Edition 02.2022
SICAM A8000 Devices
15.2 Testing SICAM A8000 Devices

[sc_le_forcing_add, 2, en_US]

NOTE

i You can only force Chart values.

Removing a Signal from the Forcing Table

To remove a signal from the forcing table:
² Click the symbol between Process value and Chart value of the desired signal again.

The symbol changes to and the selected signal is removed from the forcing list.

[sc_le_forcing_remove, 2, en_US]

Forcing a Signal Element Value

To force a signal element value:
² During monitoring mode of your CFC plan, activate the Forced option. Now you can modify the Value;
after pressing <Enter> the entered value is forced.
² If a value is already forced, modifying the Value will also set the new value in the system.

NOTE

i Setting the Forced option can only be done during monitoring mode. Furthermore, stopping monitoring
mode will disable all forcings set during your last monitoring session.

NOTE

i Output signals can only be forced if the plan is paused (Operation menu).

208 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
 SICAM A8000 Devices
15.2 Testing SICAM A8000 Devices

NOTE

i If Forced has been enabled for a signal, it is not possible to disable the forcing during the currently active
monitoring session.

Disconnecting a Signal from the Process Bus

To disconnect a signal from the process:
² During monitoring mode of your CFC plan, activate the Disconnected option.
² If a value is disconnected, deactivating the Disconnected option will reconnect the signal to the process
bus again.

NOTE

i Setting the Disconnected option can only be done during monitoring mode.

Related Topics
² 13 Function Charts (CFC)
² 17.2.4 Testing
² 5.4 Adding and Processing Elements in the Function Chart
² 15.2 Testing SICAM A8000 Devices

15.2.2 Testing Actions in Synchronized and Non-Synchronized State

When using redundancy, the Operation panel shows a redundancy-related area for redundant resources.

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 209

, Edition 02.2022
SICAM A8000 Devices
15.2 Testing SICAM A8000 Devices

[sc_redundant testing card, 1, en_US]

Redundancy State
If a redundant device is in online operation and its Redundancy state is unknown and/or its Synchronized
state is unknown, the connection to the device may be interrupted or the device does not send an intelligible
answer.
During start-up of the Logic Editor Redundancy state and Synchronized state can be displayed as unknown
for a short time, but should not during online operation.
Redundancy state and Synchronized state are cyclically interrogated during online operation and are auto-
matically updated in case of any change of the device's state.

Synchronized State
Depending on the Synchronized state the following actions are possible or not.
Action Synchronized: Yes Synchronized: No
Cold/Warm Start no yes
Halt/Continue/Cycle Step no yes
Disconnect/Reconnect of input/ no yes
output signals
Force input/output signals no yes

The corresponding buttons are active or inactive depending on the Synchronized state.

210 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
 SICAM A8000 Devices
15.2 Testing SICAM A8000 Devices

Start/Stop Synchronization

NOTE

i When the synchronization is stopped, the redundant devices show different states, because they work on
different process images.

Simulation
In simulation mode the behavior is like during online operation, though the Redundancy state is displayed as
unknown.

15.2.3 SICAM CP-8000, CP-8021, CP-8022

15.2.3.1 Testing Input Wiring

Example: You want to test if switch X1 is properly connected with signal 1, switch X2 with signal 2, etc.

[sc_test_inputwiring_example, 1, --_--]

To do so, you press X1 and check if the value of signal 1 changes.

There are 2 possible ways:

• Halt the chart

• Disconnect all output signals from the process

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 211

, Edition 02.2022
SICAM A8000 Devices
15.2 Testing SICAM A8000 Devices

Halt the Chart

[sc_test_outputwiring_halt, 2, en_US]

[sc_test_inputwiring_halt_chart, 1, --_--]

In this case, all actual input process values (Input PI) are written to the input signals in the chart and are visible
in the online test. The chart processing is halted, all input-signal values (signals 1 to 5) are not processed, so
the output signals 6 and 7 remain unchanged.
Example: When switching X1, the value Switch 1 is copied from the Input Process Image (Input PI) to signal 1
in the chart. When modifying the value of potentiometer P1, the current value Pot 1 is copied to signal 4 in
the chart.

212 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
 SICAM A8000 Devices
15.2 Testing SICAM A8000 Devices

Disconnect all Output Signals from the Process

[sc_test_inputwiring_disconnect, 2, en_US]

[sc_test_inputwiring_disconnect_chart, 1, --_--]

NOTE

i In this case the input wiring and the chart are tested.

All input process values (Input PI) are written to the according input signals in the chart. These values are
processed in the chart and the output signals in the chart are filled with the calculated values.
However, all output signals are disconnected from the process, so all calculated values are NOT written to the
Output PI (process image), thus the output process is not influenced (Relay 1 and Motor 1 remain
unchanged).

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 213

, Edition 02.2022
SICAM A8000 Devices
15.2 Testing SICAM A8000 Devices

Related Topics
15.2 Testing SICAM A8000 Devices

15.2.3.2 Testing Charts

There are 2 ways to test a chart:

• Using the real values from the input process

• Using forced values

Using the Real Values from the Input Process

In this case it is necessary to disconnect all output signals from the process.

[sc_test_inputwiring_disconnect, 2, en_US]

[sc_test_inputwiring_disconnect_chart, 1, --_--]

214 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
 SICAM A8000 Devices
15.2 Testing SICAM A8000 Devices

If you use the real values from the input process, the input signals are NOT disconnected from the process.
Now you can modify the input process values (e.g. switch X1, X2, X3, potentiometer P1, P2). These values are
written to the input signals of the chart and, furthermore, the signals are calculated and the calculated values
are written to the output signals (6 and 7).

Using Forced Values

In this case, all input and output signals have to be disconnected from the process.

[sc_test_chart_dis_inout_en, 1, en_US]

[sc_test_chart_disconnect_inout_chart, 1, --_--]

Now you can modify (force) the values of all input signals (1 to 5) in the chart and check if these values are
calculated properly (check the calculated output signals 6 and 7).

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 215

, Edition 02.2022
SICAM A8000 Devices
15.2 Testing SICAM A8000 Devices

You can connect individual signals to the process. For example, if you want to use the real value from the
potentiometer P1, reconnect signal 4 to the process (deactivate Forcing – see 15.2.1 Testing Signals
(Forcing)):

[sc_test_chart_signal4_chart, 1, --_--]

Now the input signal 4 receives the real value from the potentiometer P1.

Related Topics
15.2 Testing SICAM A8000 Devices

15.2.3.3 Testing Output Wiring

The only way to test the output wiring is to halt the chart:

[sc_test_outputwiring_halt, 2, en_US]

216 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
 SICAM A8000 Devices
15.2 Testing SICAM A8000 Devices

[sc_test_inputwiring_halt_chart, 1, --_--]

In this case, signal 6 and signal 7 are not overwritten by the chart values.
Now you can force the values for signal 6 and signal 7, so these values are written to the output process
(Relay 1 and Motor 1). Details see 15.2.1 Testing Signals (Forcing).

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 217

, Edition 02.2022
SICAM A8000 Devices
15.2 Testing SICAM A8000 Devices

[sc_test_outputwiring_halt_signals6u7, 1, en_US]

In case of a cycle step or when continuing the chart processing, all output signals are overwritten by the calcu-
lated values of the chart.

Related Topics
15.2 Testing SICAM A8000 Devices

15.2.4 SICAM CP-8050, CP-8031

15.2.4.1 Testing Input Wiring

Example: You want to test if switch X1 is properly connected with signal 1, switch X2 with signal 2, etc.

218 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
 SICAM A8000 Devices
15.2 Testing SICAM A8000 Devices

[sc_test_inputwiring_example, 1, --_--]

To do so, disconnect all input signals from the process.

Then press X2 and check if the value of signal 2 changes.

[sc_testing inputs cp-8050, 2, en_US]

The process value changes to 1, the chart value remains unchanged 0.

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 219

, Edition 02.2022
SICAM A8000 Devices
15.2 Testing SICAM A8000 Devices

Related Topics
15.2 Testing SICAM A8000 Devices
5.8.3 Bumpless Reload

15.2.4.2 Testing Charts

Example: You want to test the functionality of the chart, but the outputs (R1, M1) must not be changed.

[sc_test_inputwiring_example, 1, --_--]

To do so, disconnect all output signals from the process.

Then press X2, change P1, and check if the values of Signal 6 and Signal 7 remain unchanged.

220 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
 SICAM A8000 Devices
15.2 Testing SICAM A8000 Devices

[sc_testing chart cp-8050, 2, en_US]

The process values of Signal 6 and Signal 7 both remain unchanged.

Related Topics
15.2 Testing SICAM A8000 Devices
5.8.3 Bumpless Reload

15.2.4.3 Testing Output Wiring

Example: You want to test Signal 6 is properly connected with Relay 1, Signal 7 with Motor 1, etc.

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 221

, Edition 02.2022
SICAM A8000 Devices
15.2 Testing SICAM A8000 Devices

[sc_test_inputwiring_example, 1, --_--]

To do so, disconnect all output signals from the process.

Then change the value of Signal 7 in the Process value column and check if the value of M1 changes.

[sc_testing outputs cp-8050, 2, en_US]

The process value of M1 changes to the new value.

222 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
 SICAM A8000 Devices
15.2 Testing SICAM A8000 Devices

Related Topics
15.2 Testing SICAM A8000 Devices
5.8.3 Bumpless Reload

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 223

, Edition 02.2022
16 Redundancy

16.1 Display of Redundant Devices 225

16.2 Possible Operations of Redundant Devices/Resources 226

224 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
 Redundancy
16.1 Display of Redundant Devices

16.1 Display of Redundant Devices

If 2 devices are configured in the Device Manager, they are displayed as follows in the Logic Editor:

• In the Project Navigation, device A and device B are dislayed with separate icons.

• If one resource is redundant, this will be displayed read-only on device B.

[sc_redundancy_display, 1, en_US]

Figure 16-1 Device A (left) and Device B (right)

Icon Description
Device A

Device B

Resource (editable)

Redundant resource in device A (editable)

Redundant resource in device B (read-only)

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 225

, Edition 02.2022
Redundancy
16.2 Possible Operations of Redundant Devices/Resources

16.2 Possible Operations of Redundant Devices/Resources

For device A there is no change compared to non-redundant configuration. You can edit the device and the
resources as usual.
For device B, the following differences apply:

Operation Non-redundant resource Redundant resource

Simulation can be executed can be executed
Online Test can be executed can be executed
Charts, USBs, and Structures can be edited read-only
Trend and Dynamic Display can be edited can be edited
Will be compiled? yes no

Compiling Device/Resource
You can compile the complete device or a single resource via the context menu.
Redundant resources in device B cannot be compiled.

226 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
 Redundancy
16.2 Possible Operations of Redundant Devices/Resources

[sc_res_redundant_compile, 1, en_US]

Figure 16-2 Compiling a Device or a Resource

For Test
When using redundancy, it is possible to set or clear "For test" for all inputs/outputs of a block on the level of:

• device

• resource

• chart

• UFB
This bulk operation affects all inputs/outputs of function blocks and functions contained in charts beneath the
selected context-menu level.

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 227

, Edition 02.2022
Redundancy
16.2 Possible Operations of Redundant Devices/Resources

[sc_redundant_fortest, 1, en_US]

Figure 16-3 Set/Clear "For Test"

For device A you have the possibility to set or clear "For test" for single values via the Control flow tab.

228 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
 Redundancy
16.2 Possible Operations of Redundant Devices/Resources

[sc_redundant_fortest_single, 1, en_US]

Figure 16-4 Set/Clear "For Test" for Single Values in Device A

For device B you do not have the possibility to set or clear "For test" for single values. Using the bulk opera-
tion in the context menu all values of the selected level (device/resource/chart/UFB) are set or cleared.

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 229

, Edition 02.2022
17 User Interface

17.1 Editors 231

17.2 Tabs in the Task Area 238
17.3 Entry, Selection, and Display Areas 244
17.4 Dialogs 245
17.5 Toolbars 247

230 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
 User Interface
17.1 Editors

17.1 Editors

17.1.1 Function-Chart (CFC) Editor

You can use the Function-chart Editor to configure additional functions for the device. Use predefined blocks
for this.

Elements and Explanations

You can find explanations for the elements of the Function-chart editor in the following table.
Element Explanation
Data flow The 17.1.2 Data Flow tab is used to configure the CFC function as a graphic function
chart.
You can do this in one of the following ways:

• Interconnecting modules by drag and drop

• Documenting the function chart with text boxes
• Optimizing the function chart for execution in the device
Control flow Use the 17.1.3 Control Flow tab to configure the CFC function in text form and
change the execution order, if required.
You can do this in one of the following ways:

• Interconnecting modules by text

• Changing running sequence of components
• Observing values of the highlighted inputs and outputs during the function-chart
tracking

Linked Tabs in the Task Card

If the Function-chart editor is opened in the working area, the following tabs are visible in the task card:

• 17.2.1 Libraries
This tab can be used to add function blocks to the function chart.

• 17.2.2 Signals
This tab can be used to add signals to the function chart.

• 17.2.5 Instructions
This tab can be used to add instructions to the function chart.

• 17.2.4 Testing

• 17.2.3 Variables

Related Topics
5.1.1 Meaning of CFC
5.1.5 Configuration Strategy

17.1.2 Data Flow

You can use the Data flow tab to configure the CFC function as a graphic function chart.

Elements and Explanations

You can find explanations for the elements of the Data flow tab in the following table.

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 231

, Edition 02.2022
User Interface
17.1 Editors

Element Explanation

Interface
Name This column displays the following sections:

• Input
This section displays the input pins and allows you to add the input terminals of
the CFC block to configure the interface.
• Output
This section displays the output pins and allows you to add the output terminals
of the CFC block to configure the interface..
• InOut
This section displays the IO pins and allows you to add the IO terminals of the
CFC block to configure the interface.
Type This field contains the data type of the block connection. The following data types are
possible:

• Bool
• DInt
• Real
• Time
• Struct
Value This field contains the default value of the block connection.
Configurable The state of this check box indicates the default setting for the parameterization of
the block connection.
Interconnectable The state of this check box indicates the default setting for the interconnectability of
the block connection.
Comment This field contains a comment about the block connection that has been preset in the
factory.
Toolbar The 17.5.2 Toolbar Data Flow allows fast access to actions and settings.
Working area This working area is used to generate the function chart for the CFC function. Place
the blocks from the library in the working area for this purpose. Next, set parameters
for the blocks and then interconnect them. Use the signals and settings from the
signal catalog to establish the connection to the process or to internal functions.

Related Topics
17.1.1 Function-Chart (CFC) Editor

17.1.3 Control Flow

You can use the Control flow tab to configure the CFC function and change the running sequence, if neces-
sary.

Elements and Explanations

You can find explanations for the elements of the Control flow tab in the following table.
Element Explanation
Toolbar The 17.5.3 Toolbar of the Control Flow allows fast access to actions and settings.
Run sequence This column contains the numbering of the running sequence. This numbering indi-
cates the order in which the modules are processed in the device. The control flow
shows the modules in the order in which they will later be processed. You can add
modules and set parameters in the same way as the data flow.

232 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
 User Interface
17.1 Editors

Element Explanation
Object/parameter This column contains the names of all modules in the function chart. You will see an
arrow tip to the left of a module name. You can show or hide the module connections
by clicking on this arrow tip. Connections selected as Invisible are not displayed.
Operand In the control flow, operands with a fixed syntax designate the interconnections
between the modules. This column contains the operands to the module connections.
An operand can be one of the following:

• A value
• An interconnection to another module
• An interconnection to a signal
You can also enter a value manually in this column.
Add forcing This column contains 1 check box for each input and output. If you select this check
box in the offline mode, a force value can be added to the block IO in the online
mode. This check box has to be selected before starting the online analysis.
Forcing active This column contains 1 check box for each input and output. If you select this check
box in the online mode, the force value will be written to the device.
Force value This column contains 1 field for each input and output. This field contains the value
that is written to the device when forcing is activated.
For Test If this checkbox is active, the parameter is used for test.

Related Topics
17.1.1 Function-Chart (CFC) Editor

17.1.4 Trend Display Editor

Elements and Explanations

You can find explanations for the elements of the Trend display editor in the following table.
Element Explanation
Toolbar of the Trend Display
This button is used to update the trend data.

This button enables you to add the analog axis.

This button enables you to add the digital axis.

This list box enables you to set the time range of the x-axis (input in minutes).

Elements of the Trend display editor

y-axis/trend This column displays the name of the y axis/name of the trend in the diagram.
Tag name This column displays the block parameter/tag in the chart.
Trend color This column displays the trend color.
Emphasis This column displays the emphasis of the curve (thick/thin).
Sampling time This column displays the sampling time in seconds. If you select the option as 0, then
every received value is applied.
Value representation This column displays the measured values connected by lines or only as points.
Min This column displays the low value of the y axis.
Max This column displays the high value of the y axis
Unit This column displays the respective unit.
Axis position This column displays the axis position (left or right).
Axis mode This column displays the axis mode (linear or logarithmic).

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 233

, Edition 02.2022
User Interface
17.1 Editors

Element Explanation
Toolbar of the Trend Chart Display
Zoom (icons) The zoom icons can be used to zoom the horizontal and vertical axes separately. The
toolbar provides a zoom in and a zoom out icon.
Display mode (selec- The display mode for the x time axis of the trend chart can be set up using the selec-
tion box) tion box of the toolbar.
The following display modes are available:

• Static
You can select this option for a static time range display. The time interval is not
refreshed. You can set any range. This mode can be used to visualize all logged
values in detail. Siemens recommends using this display mode for static values.
• Strip
You can select this option for a dynamic display. The time axis always displays
the current time at the far right. You can change the duration of the time
interval.
• Scope (jumping time range display)
The time axis displays a fixed time interval. Once the trend values reach the right
edge, the display changes so that the current time is shown at the left edge.
• Sweep
You can select this option for a sweep mode display. This mode is similar to the
Scope mode. However, the values of the last sweep continue to be displayed
until they are overwritten by the current values.
Trend manager The trend manager visualizes the trend to axis assignments. You can hide trends by
(Select trend: selec- disabling the corresponding check box. Hidden trends are no longer recorded in the
tion field) trend chart, but still displayed in the legend in dimmed mode. Select trends to be
edited in the trend manager. In addition to a color code, the trends in the trend chart
are also provided with a marker to enable their quick identification in the legend and
trend manager.
Import/export (icons) The trends can be exported or imported in CSV format. The export icon is enabled
once you have selected a trend in the trend manager. Imported trends are visualized
on separate x and y axes. You can improve the comparison of an imported trend with
a trend from active logging by linking the x-axis of the imported trend with the
existing axis.
Customizing the user This menu can be used to show and hide display elements such as the legends, rulers,
interface (View or markers.
menu)
Linking x axes (Link When a trend is imported, the new x-axis (axis B) can be linked to the existing x-axis
axes selection field) (axis A). In the linked mode, axis B moves simultaneously with axis A, but can be
adjusted without interfering with axis A. This mode allows you to compare history
trends with the current trend.
Printing (Print icon) The print dialog can be used to print the currently displayed trends of the trend chart.
The printout can include a comment.

234 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
 User Interface
17.1 Editors

Element Explanation

Trend Window Elements and Operating Options

Maximum value This field displays the maximum value of an analog axis. The access for editing
depends on the state of the associated write protection

• Write protection disabled state (open padlock icon): You can edit the value in the
corresponding column of the definition table, or directly in this field. Changes to
the cell in the definition table are transferred to the field of the y axis. However,
changes to the field of the y axis are not transferred to the corresponding cell in
the definition table.
• Write protection enabled state (closed padlock icon): The value cannot be edited
in the corresponding column of the definition table or in the y axis field.
You can restore the configured minimum/maximum with double-click on the y axis.
Write protection for Using this icon, you can enable write protection for the input field next to the icon
the input field (closed padlock icon), or disable it (open padlock icon).

• Write protection disabled state (open padlock icon): You can edit the value in the
corresponding column of the definition table, or directly in this field. Changes to
the cell in the definition table are transferred to the field of the y-axis. However,
changes to the field of the y-axis are not transferred to the corresponding cell in
the definition table.
• Write protection enabled state (closed padlock icon): The value cannot be edited
in the corresponding column of the definition table or in the y-axis field.
Y axis (here: analog The y-axis is labeled with the axis name and the configured physical unit.
axis)
Minimum value This field displays the minimum value of an analog axis. The access for editing
depends on the state of the write protection.
Time (right edge of This field displays the time for the right edge of the x-axis. The write access depends
the visualized trend on:
range)
• The state of the associated write protection
• The selected display mode
You can use the selection function to open a calendar and select a different day.
Time range of the x- The time range of the x-axis is set in the definition table.
axis
Time (left edge of the This field displays the time for the left edge of the x-axis. The write access depends on
visualized trend the following:
range)
• The state of the associated write protection
• The selected display mode
You can use the selection function to open a calendar and select a different day.
Digital trend names The names of the digital trends are displayed outside of the trend chart. The position
depends on the configured position of the digital axis.
Y axis (here: digital The y-axis is labeled with the axis names.
axis)
Legend (analog The legend displays the markers and names of the visualized analog trends. The corre-
trends) sponding values are displayed to the right of the trend name:

• If there is no ruler, the last values added to the trend are displayed.
• If at least one ruler is displayed, the associated values are displayed to the right
of the trend name at the active ruler.

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 235

, Edition 02.2022
User Interface
17.1 Editors

Element Explanation
Analog trends Analog trends are visualized in the upper area of the trend window. The names of the
analog trends (F) are displayed in the legend of the trend chart.
A tooltip is displayed for each visualized trend whenever you position the mouse
pointer on the trend line. The tooltip first displays the trend name. Click this name to
display the configured data source.
Markers Markers help you to distinguish between several trends. You can enable the display of
markers in the View menu.
Interpolated trend A value without underscore on the ruler indicates that this is an interpolated value. A
value defined online value is not available for this trend point.
Defined trend value An underscored value on the ruler indicates that this is a defined online value.
Digital trends Digital trends are visualized in the lower area of the trend window. The names of the
digital trends are displayed outside of the trend chart. The position depends on the
configured position of the digital axis. A tooltip is displayed for each visualized trend
whenever you position the mouse pointer on the trend line. The tooltip first displays
the trend name. Click this name to display the configured data source.
Ruler A ruler displays the value of each trend at the ruler/trend intersections. Every ruler
displays the associated time stamp with date and time. A trend chart may have
several rulers.
The active ruler is indicated by a yellow marker at its top end. The values at the active
rulers are displayed in the legend (A) to the right of the trend name.

• Adding rulers:
You can drag and drop a new ruler from its docking position on the left edge of
the trend chart to a specific position in the trend chart.
• Copying rulers:
Press <CTRL> and click the ruler to paste a copy thereof.
• Deleting rulers:
Drag the ruler to the left edge of the trend chart.
Press <Alt> and click the ruler to be deleted.

236 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
 User Interface
17.1 Editors

Element Explanation
Ratio display/scroll This function depends on the selected display mode and only affects analog trends:
bar (y-axis)
• Scroll bar function along with the ratio display in the Static display mode.
• Ratio display in all other display modes.

Ratio display
The scroll bar displays the approximate ratio between the configured and currently
displayed range of values of the y-axis in the trend chart.

Scroll bar
The scroll bar can be used to shift the visible range of a trend in the trend chart if the
displayed time range of the y-axis was modified in vertical direction, for example, by
means of the zoom icons.
Ratio display/scroll This function depends on the selected display mode and only affects analog trends:
bar (x-axis)
• Scroll bar function along with the ratio display in the Static display mode.
• Ratio display in all other display modes.

Ratio display
The scroll bar displays the approximate ratio between the configured and currently
displayed range of values of the x-axis in the trend chart.

Scroll bar
The scroll bar can be used to shift the visible range of a trend in the trend chart if the
displayed time range of the x-axis was modified in horizontal direction, for example,
by means of the zoom icons.

Related Topics
8.1 Brief Introduction to User-Defined Function Blocks
17.1.1 Function-Chart (CFC) Editor

17.1.5 Dynamic Display Editor

Elements and Explanations

You can find explanations for the elements of the Dynamic display editor in the following table.
Element Explanation

Toolbar of the Dynamic Display

This button is used to update the dynamic display data.

Elements of the Dynamic Display editor

Tag name This column displays the block parameter/tag in the chart.
Value This column displays the respective value.
Online value This column displays the online value if the For Test option is set and if the address is
available.
For test This column enables you to select the For Test option for the respective parameter.
Comment This column displays the comment in the function block-terminal to which the signal
is connected.

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 237

, Edition 02.2022
User Interface
17.2 Tabs in the Task Area

Related Topics
17.1.1 Function-Chart (CFC) Editor

17.2 Tabs in the Task Area

17.2.1 Libraries

The Libraries tab contains the global Logic Editor library and the project library. To create a single-line diagram
or a display page, for example, use elements from the global Logic Editor library.
The Libraries tab is divided into 3 palettes:

• Project library

• Global libraries

• Information

Elements and Explanations

You can find explanations for the elements of the Libraries tab in the following table.
Element Explanation

Project Library
The project library is intended for future expansion.

Global Libraries
Toolbar This is used for fast access to actions and settings in the Global Logic Editor library palette to
work with the user-defined global Logic Editor library.
List box This list box is used to filter the display of the global Logic Editor library. To be able to see all
elements, select the All settings. If you select the Context-based filtering setting, only those
elements that you require for work with the active editor are displayed.
Library struc- Folders named Global Logic Editor library and Documentation templates with subfolders are
ture displayed in the Global libraries palette. You can view the device types grouped under the
respective device family. The content of this library is structured hierarchically. As in the
project tree, you can navigate through the structure and show or hide individual levels.

Information
Display area This display area provides additional information on an element marked in the library. Such
information is typically the type of element or a brief description regarding the use of the
element.

Linked Tools in the Working Area

You can always access the Libraries tab, irrespective of which tool is opened in the working area.

Related Topics
17.2.2 Signals
17.2.4 Testing
17.2.5 Instructions
17.2.3 Variables

238 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
 User Interface
17.2 Tabs in the Task Area

17.2.2 Signals

The Signals tab contains the signals of all offline configurations in the project. You use a list box to select an
offline configuration whose signals will be displayed in the signal catalog palette. The Signals tab is typically
used to link elements on a display page to signals.

Elements and Explanations

You can find explanations for the elements of the Signals tab in the following table.
Element Explanation
Filter bar With the filter bar you can enter a textual filter to be used for filtering the signal list. Wildcards
(*) are allowed.

Signal Catalog
Name The name of the signal or signal element.
TI The type information of the signal.
Type The data type of the signal element (BOOL, DINT, REAL, TIME).

Linked Tools in the Working Area

You can access the Signals tab as soon as a 17.1.1 Function-Chart (CFC) Editor is open.

Related Topics
17.2.1 Libraries
17.2.4 Testing
17.2.5 Instructions
17.2.3 Variables

17.2.3 Variables

The Variables tab contains local (plan-specific) variables of block terminals and instantiated structures.

[sc_variables, 1, en_US]

These variables can be used as a temporary storage inside a CFC plan. For details on how to handle variables in
the A8000 device, refer to the device manual.

Example

[sc_vars_example, 1, en_US]

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 239

, Edition 02.2022
User Interface
17.2 Tabs in the Task Area

NOTE

i The type cannot be modified.

NOTE

i For structures it is not possible to enable/disable the fields Const and Retain. This has to be done in the
structure editor.

Adding Variables and Structures

² To easily add a variable, right-click the terminal of a block and select Create Internal Variable from the
context menu.

[sc_vars_add, 1, en_US]

For type-independent instructions, additionally select the required type of the internal variable.

[sc_le_int_var, 1, en_US]

² To easily add a structure, right-click the structure in the Project Navigator tree and select Instantiate
structure from the context menu.

[sc_vars_add2, 1, en_US]

Removing Variables
² To remove a created internal variable, right-click the variable and select Delete from the context menu.

240 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
 User Interface
17.2 Tabs in the Task Area

[sc_vars_remove, 1, en_US]

Jump to Used Variable

As soon as a variable has been connected, you can use the context menu to jump to the locations where this
variable is connected.
² Right-click the desired variable.
² Select Used by... from the context menu.
² Select the target location from the list.

[sc_vars_jump, 1, en_US]

Related Topics
13 Function Charts (CFC)
17.2.1 Libraries
17.2.2 Signals
17.2.4 Testing
17.2.5 Instructions

17.2.4 Testing

The Testing tab contains the palettes Operation Panel, Automation State, and Signals For Test.

Elements and Explanations

You can find explanations for the elements of the Tasks tab in the following table.
Element Explanation
Operation Panel
Cold start Initializes all data and starts
Warm start Initializes all non-buffered data and starts
Halt Interrupts the process; code will not be processed from the next cycle
onwards.
Continue Continue processing after Halt
Cycle step Execute one cycle step
Disconnect input signals Disconnects all input signals from the process bus.
Disconnect output signals Disconnects all output signals from the process bus.

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 241

, Edition 02.2022
User Interface
17.2 Tabs in the Task Area

Element Explanation
Reconnect input signals Reconnects all input signals to the process bus again.
Reconnect output signals Reconnects all output signals to the process bus again.
Automation State
Watch cycle Information about cycle time (current/max/defined)
Memory code size Current memory consumption of the device
Variable size Memory consumption of variables of the device
Signals For Test
Disconnected If active, the signal in the device is disconnected from the process bus.
Name Name of the signal element
Forced Set forcing to active (only possible in online mode).
If forced, the value from column Value is used. If not forced, the current
value is displayed.
Value The value to be set by forcing

Linked Tools in the Working Area

You can access the Testing tab as soon as one of the following tools is open in the working area:

• 17.1.1 Function-Chart (CFC) Editor

• Trend/Dynamic Display

• User-Defined Function Blocks

Related Topics
17.2.1 Libraries
17.2.2 Signals
17.2.5 Instructions
17.2.3 Variables
6.12 Watching Values in Trend/Dynamic Display while CFC Online Analysis (Monitoring) is in Progress
8 Configuring User-Defined Function Blocks
15.2.1 Testing Signals (Forcing)

17.2.5 Instructions

The Instructions tab contains all relevant actions for inserting Blocks into CFC plans. The panel is visible when
a CFC editor is open.

242 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
 User Interface
17.2 Tabs in the Task Area

[le_le_tab_instructions, 1, en_US]

(1) Favorites
For easier usage you can add basic instructions to this palette using drag and drop. So you can
quickly use the instruction from this panel.
(2) Basic instructions
Contains all block types described in 10 Instructions (Blocks). To assign an instruction to the
currently opened CFC plan, use drag and drop or double-click the block to add it automatically to
the current plan.
(3) Used objects
Contains a list of all used basic block types and user-defined function blocks in your plans.

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 243

, Edition 02.2022
User Interface
17.3 Entry, Selection, and Display Areas

Related Topics
10 Instructions (Blocks)
17.2.2 Signals
17.2.4 Testing
17.2.5 Instructions
17.2.3 Variables

17.3 Entry, Selection, and Display Areas

17.3.1 Info

The Info tab displays messages with which you can monitor states, sequences and results of actions. The
messages are divided thematically into 3 further tabs.

Elements and Explanations

You can find explanations for the elements of the Info tab in the following table.
Element Explanation
General The 17.3.2 General tab displays status messages, warnings, and error messages on
currently executed actions.
Cross-reference The Cross-reference tab is not required for working with Logic Editor.
Compile The 17.3.3 Compile tab displays status messages, warnings, and error messages
pertaining to the compilation of function charts (CFC).

17.3.2 General

The General tab displays status messages, warnings, and error messages on currently executed actions. You
can manually copy and delete the messages in this tab.
Each message is displayed with additional information that is divided into several columns.

Elements and Explanations

You can find explanations for the elements of the General tab in the following table.
Element Explanation
! This column contains one of the following icons:

You find more information about the icons under 2.3 Icons in the Info Tab.
Message This column contains the message text. A message text identified with an arrow pools
several subordinate messages. By clicking the arrow, you show or hide the subordi-
nate messages.
Date This column contains the date at the time of the action.
Time This column contains the time-of-day at the time of the action.
Go to Jumps to the location in the software that is relevant for the particular message
? (Help) Shows a question mark if additional help exists for an alarm. Click the question mark
to open the help.

244 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
 User Interface
17.4 Dialogs

Related Topics
2.4 Copying and Deleting Messages
17.3.1 Info

17.3.3 Compile

If you manually start the compiling of function charts (CFC) of a A8000 device, all function charts are checked
for consistency during the compiling. The Compile tab displays status messages, warnings, and error
messages pertaining to the compilation.
You can manually copy and delete the messages in this tab. A newly started compilation automatically deletes
all existing messages.
All messages belonging to an offline configuration are pooled in one group. The group is identified with the
name of the offline configuration and an arrow. By clicking the arrow, you show or hide the messages. Each
message is displayed with additional information that is divided into several columns.

Elements and Explanations

You can find explanations for the elements of the General tab in the following table.
Element Explanation
! This column contains one of the following icons:

You find more information about the icons under 2.3 Icons in the Info Tab.
Path This column contains the name of an offline configuration.
Description This column contains the message text.
Errors This column contains the number of errors.
Warnings This column contains the number of warnings.
Time This column contains the time-of-day at the time of the action.
Go to Jumps to the location in the software that is relevant for the particular message
? (Help) Shows a question mark if additional help exists for an alarm. Click the question mark
to open the help.

Related Topics
2.4 Copying and Deleting Messages
17.3.1 Info

17.4 Dialogs

17.4.1 Add New Chart

You can use this dialog to add an offline configuration to a new function chart (CFC).

Elements and Explanations

You can find explanations for the elements of the Add new chart dialog in the following table.
Element Explanation
Name This text box contains a consecutively numbered standard name for the function
chart. Enter another name for the function chart if required.

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 245

, Edition 02.2022
User Interface
17.4 Dialogs

Select function chart This list box is used to select the level. At the moment there is only 1 task level.
(CFC) task
Additional informa- If you click this information, the additional text boxes Comment, Version, Author,
tion and Family will be displayed.
Comment You can optionally enter a comment in this text box. Click Additional information to
show or hide this text box.
Version You can optionally enter a version number in this text box. Click Additional informa-
tion to show or hide this text box.
Author You can optionally enter your name in this text box. Click Additional information to
show or hide this text box.
Family You can optionally enter an identification for the affiliation of the function chart in
this text box, for example Line protection. Click Additional information to show or
hide this text box.
Add and open If you mark this check box, the function chart will be opened in the working area
directly after it is added.
OK This button is used to accept the settings and close the dialog. The new function chart
is added to the offline configuration.
Cancel This button is used to reject the settings and close the dialog.

Related Topics
5.1.1 Meaning of CFC
5.1.3 Function Chart
5.2.1 Adding a CFC

17.4.2 Enter Connection Password

This dialog is used to enter the connection password.

Elements and Explanations

You can find explanations for the elements of the Enter connection password dialog in the following table.
Element Explanation
Connection password Enter the current connection password in this entry field. An asterisk is shown for
each character that you enter.
OK This button is used to accept the entry and close the dialog.
Cancel This button is used to reject the entry and close the dialog.

17.4.3 Print Preview

You can specify the scope of preview using this dialog.

Elements and Explanations

You can find explanations for the elements of the Print preview dialog in the following table.
Element Explanation
Document layout
Document informa- This list box is used to select a document template for the printout. If you click the list
tion box, an additional selection dialog will be displayed. Select a category and hence a
document template from this.
Print cover page This check box is used to select a cover page for the printout.
Print table of This check box is used to select the table of contents for the printout.
contents

246 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
 User Interface
17.5 Toolbars

Properties
All This check box is used to select all the project data for the printout.
Compact This check box is used to print the project data in the compact form.
Preview This button is used to accept the selection and close the dialog. The Print preview
opens in the working area.
Cancel This button is used to reject the selection and close the dialog.

17.4.4 Print

This dialog is used to select a printer, a document template, and a cover page and then start the printout.

Elements and Explanations

You can find explanations for the elements of the Print dialog in the following table.
Element Explanation
Printer
Name This list box is used to select the printer to be used for the printout. The list box
contains the names of all output devices for which the respective drivers are installed.
Advanced... This button is used to open the Print dialog. You can set further print-specific settings
with this dialog.
Status This field contains the status of the printer currently selected. The status indicates
whether the printer is ready for printing or not.
Type This field contains the name of the printer currently selected.
Location This field contains information on the location which is saved in the printer proper-
ties.
Comment This field contains a comment which is saved in the printer properties.
Document layout
Document informa- This list box is used to select a document template for the printout. If you click the list
tion box, an additional selection dialog will be displayed. Select a category and hence a
document template from this.
Print cover page This check box is used to select a cover page for the printout.
Print table of This check box is used to select the table of contents for the printout.
contents
Properties
All This check box is used to select all the project data for the printout.
Compact This check box is used to print the project data in the compact form.
Preview This button is used to accept the selection and close the dialog. The Print preview
opens in the working area.
Print This button is used to accept the selection and close the dialog. The printing starts.
Cancel This button is used to reject the selection and close the dialog.

Related Topics
11.4.1 Starting the Printing

17.5 Toolbars

17.5.1 Logic Editor Toolbar

This toolbar gives you fast access to actions and settings in the Logic Editor.

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 247

, Edition 02.2022
User Interface
17.5 Toolbars

Elements and Explanations

You can find explanations for the elements of the toolbar in the following table.

Element Explanation
This button is used to save the opened project. This button is only active if the data has
changed.
This button is used to print project and device data. If in 1.1.2 Project Tree the project name
or an offline configuration is selected, the 17.4.4 Print dialog opens. Otherwise, the printout
starts directly.
This button is used to cut a marked object (element or value) and copy it to the clipboard. If
you paste the object at another permissible location, it will be deleted at the current posi-
tion. This button only becomes active if at least one suitable object is marked.
This button is used to copy a marked object (element or value) to the clipboard. You can
then paste a copy of the object at another permissible location. The original object is
retained here. This button only becomes active if at least one suitable object is marked.
This button is used to paste the content of the clipboard at another permissible location. This
button only becomes active if the clipboard contains at least one suitable object.
This button is used to delete a marked object (element or value).

This button is used to undo the most recent change and revert back to the previous value.
This button is active only if you modify any values in the editors of the 1.1.1 User Interface.
This button is used to reverse the change made by the Undo operation. This button is active
only if you perform the Undo operation in the editors of the 1.1.1 User Interface.
This button is used to start the compilation process for function charts (CFC). This button
only becomes active if one of the following requirements is met:

• The name of the offline configuration is marked in the project tree.

• An element of the offline configuration is marked in the project tree.
• The 17.1.1 Function-Chart (CFC) Editor opens in the working area.
This button is used to upload the compiled CFC to the device.

This button starts/stops the CFC online analysis (Monitoring). Refer to Online Analysis of
Function Charts (CFC) - Monitoring, Page 199.
This button starts/stops the CFC offline analysis (Simulation). Refer to Offline Analysis of
Function Charts (CFC) - Simulation, Page 200.
This button is used to divide the working area horizontally. This allows you to arrange
2 editors or editing tools below one another. This button only becomes active if exactly 2
editing tools are opened.
This button is used to divide the working area vertically. This allows you to arrange 2 editors
or editing tools next to one another. This button only becomes active if exactly 2 editing
tools are opened.

Related Topics
1.1.1 User Interface

17.5.2 Toolbar Data Flow

This toolbar gives you fast access to actions and settings in the Data flow of a function chart (CFC).

Elements and Explanations

You can find explanations for the elements of the toolbar in the following table.

248 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
 User Interface
17.5 Toolbars

Element Explanation
Toggles between the different views of the sheet bar.
You can select the following views:

• No sheet bars
• Static sheet bars
• Dynamic sheet bars
Changes between single and double numbers of rows in the sheet bar.

Shows or hides the sheet borders (not working if sheet bars are shown).

Shows or hides the grid in the function chart.

Shows or hides the sequence order.

Shows or hides units of parameters.

Toggles between displaying the name of the block instance or the name of the block type.

Deactivates highlighting of the signal flow.

Activates the tool for adding a text box.

Changes to the 17.1.3 Control Flow. The data of a block marked in the Data flow is empha-
sized by a colored area in the Control flow.
Incrementally zooms in the display of the function chart. This button is not active if you can
no longer zoom in the display.
Incrementally zooms out the display of the function chart. This button is not active if you can
no longer zoom out the display.
Scales the display in percent. Therefore, open the list box and select a specified percentage
value. Alternatively, enter an integral percentage value from 10 to 200 in the entry field of
the list box. If you click outside the list box with the mouse or press the <Enter> key, the
display is updated.
Starts or stops the online analysis (monitoring) for the function charts (CFC).

Starts or stops the offline analysis (simulation) for the function charts (CFC).

Starts the automatic optimization of the function chart.

Sorts the objects according to the data flow. Siemens recommends saving the project before
sorting.
Lets you select the task level. At the moment, there is only 1 task level.

Related Topics
17.1.2 Data Flow
14.1 Analyzing Function Charts (CFC)

17.5.3 Toolbar of the Control Flow

This toolbar gives you fast access to actions and settings in the Control flow.

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 249

, Edition 02.2022
User Interface
17.5 Toolbars

Elements and Explanations

You can find explanations for the elements of the toolbar in the following table.
Element Explanation
Show top element.

Show all lower-level elements.

Show selected object in data flow.

This list box is used to select the task level. At the moment there is only 1 task level.

This button is used to start the automatic optimization of the function chart.

Save the windows settings.

Related Topics
17.1.3 Control Flow

250 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
Index

A C
Absolute value 132 Catalog 239
ACG 50 Center 64
Add 44, 60, 63, 132, 245 CFC 38, 39, 39, 40, 41, 44, 118, 119, 119, 188, 189,
Adjusting Sheet Bars 57 190, 191, 191, 192, 193, 194, 196, 196, 231, 231, 232,
Advanced 245, 248, 249
Code generation 190 Check 79
Algorithm 39 Close 30
Align 64 Column 20
Angle 158, 159, 160 Column content 23, 23
ANY_BIT 119 Column width 20
ANY_ELEMENTARY 119 Common 156
ANY_INT 119 Compare 135, 137, 137, 138, 139, 140
ANY_MAGNITUDE 119 Compile 27, 79, 244, 245
ANY_NUM 119 Configuration strategy 40
ANY_REAL 119 Configure 41
ANY_TO_B 161 Configuring A8000 devices
ANY_TO_D 161 SICAM CP-8000, CP-8021, CP-8022 203
ANY_TO_DW 162 SICAM CP-8031 204
ANY_TO_R 161 SICAM CP-8050 204
ANY_TO_T 162 Connection password 246
ANY_TYPE 119 Connector 72
Arccosine 159 Consistency 79, 79
Arcsine 158 Continuous Function Chart 41, 44, 45, 46, 47, 49, 54,
Arctangent 160 60, 62, 63, 64, 65, 66, 72, 73, 77, 78, 79
creating automatically 50
Control flow 232, 249
Control Flow 48, 57
B CONTROL_PULLUP 166
Copy 46, 62
Background 63 Cosine 159
Base 156, 157, 157 Count 145, 146, 147
Basic instructions 59 Count down 145, 147
Bistable 148, 149 Count up 146, 147
Block 39, 41, 60, 61, 62, 65, 66, 68, 70, 71, 72, 77, 78, COUNTER_INTERROG_REC 171
191, 192, 193, 194, 196, 196 COUNTER_INTERROG_SEND 170
Block input 66, 66, 70, 71, 72, 73 Cover page 177, 181
Block insertion 78 Curves 166
Block instance 39 customization 95
Block interconnection 71, 71 Cycle time 142, 143
Block output 66, 66, 71, 72, 73
Block type 39, 73
Blocks 122
BOOL 118 D
Bumpless reload 80
Data flow 231, 248
Data Flow 48

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 251

, Edition 02.2022
Index

Data type 73 G
Data type STRUCT 111
Data types GENERAL_INTERROG_SEND 169
Basic 118 Global DIGSI 5 Library 238
Generic 119 Grid 175
Structured 119, 119 Showing and Hiding 59
DEADZONE_HYS 164
Delays 141, 142
Delete 31, 47, 65, 71
Denominator 133 H
Detailed view 18
digital axis 86 Help 25, 25
Display 65, 72 Hide 54, 72, 77
Display size 54, 181 Hiding 21
Distribute 64
Divide 133
Document 175, 178, 181, 181
Document layout 181 I
Document template 175, 175, 176, 177
DWORD 118 Icon 27
dynamic display 84 IEC60870DT 118
IECCMD_SET_CTRLLOC 172
Inconsistency 27, 79
Info 25, 27, 27, 244, 244, 245
E Information 25, 25, 186
Input value 78
Edge 149, 150 Inputs and Outputs 39
Edges 141, 142 Inspector window 13, 16
Edit 63 Instructions 122
Editor 231 INT 118
Editor window 18 Inter-chart connection (ICC) 75
Error indication 79, 79 Interconnect 66, 68
Exponent 157, 157 Interconnection 65, 70, 193, 196
Exponential function 157, 157 Interface 193
Invert 126
Invisible 193
F
Factor 134 L
Falling 141, 150
Filter 23, 23 Layout 53, 175, 176, 189
Final value 146 LED 144
Flash 144 Libraries 238
Flow model 41 Libraries (user-defined) 120
Forcing 205 LIMIT_LOWER_HYS 141
Format 63 LIMIT_UPPER_HYS 141
Frames 63 Line 54
Full text search 26 Link 123, 123, 124, 125, 125, 126, 127, 127, 128, 128,
Function 38, 44 129
Function block diagram 231, 231, 232 Logarithm 156
Function chart 38, 39, 40, 41, 44, 194, 245, 248, 249 Logic Editor 25, 25, 248
Function Chart 188, 190, 191, 196, 196 Logical 123, 123, 124, 125, 125, 126, 127, 127, 128,
Function-block diagram 46, 188, 189, 191, 192, 193 128, 129, 129, 129, 130, 130

252 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022
 Index

M Print Preview 180

Printer 178
Maximizing 19 Printing process 31, 177
Maximum 151, 152 Printout 184
Menu bar 12 Project 15, 30, 30, 30, 31, 31, 186
MERGE_DW 131 Conversion 186
MERGE_IEC60870DT 163 Project tree 12, 13
Message 27 Projects 30
Minimizing 19 PT1_CONTROLLER 165
Minimum 150
Minuend 135
Modulo 133
R
Multiple interconnections 67
Multiply 134
Radicand 158
Redundancy
Display of redundant devices 225
N Possible actions of redundant devices/resources 226
Remainder 133
Name 44 Remainder operation 133
Natural 157 Rename 46, 61
Navigate 183 Reset 149
Negate 70, 126 Restoring 19
NOT 126 Rising 142, 149
NOT_DW 129 Rollout 25
Numerator 133 Row 20
Ruler 175
Running sequence 77, 78

O
Object bar 13, 19
S
Off phase 144
Offline configuration 15 Save 30
On phase 144 Scale 54, 181
Open 30, 45, 180 Scope 178, 246
Opening Scope of printing 178
Subchart 100 Search 26, 27
Optimize 78 Separating 19
Options 178, 179, 181 Sequence number 77
Order 41, 77 Set parameters 73
Output value 78 SET_DIAG_ERROR 169
Overflow 136, 137, 138, 139, 139, 140 SET_DIAG_WARNING 169
Sheet Bars 55
Adjusting 57
Sheet Bars 189
P Show 54, 72, 77
Showing 21
Palette 17 Showing and Hiding the Grid 59
Password 246 Signal 33, 33, 33, 68, 196
PIDT1 Controller 164 Signal catalog 33, 33, 34
Placement 60 Signal element 34
Plausibility 73 Jump to used signal element 35
Position 60, 78 Signals 239
Preview 246 Sine 158
Preview scope 180 Size 63
Print 26, 31, 49, 177, 178, 178, 179, 180, 181, 183, Sort 23
184, 246, 247 SPLIT_DW 131
Print preview 180, 181, 183, 246 SPLIT_IEC60870DT 162

SICAM, Logic Editor, Help 253

, Edition 02.2022
Index

Splitting 19 Time stamp 188

Square root 158 Timer 143
ST Code 109 Title bar 12, 15, 17
supported instruction set 113 Tool tip 25
supported notations 114 Toolbar 12, 15, 17, 248, 248, 249
ST UFB Toolbar view 18
Data type STRUCT 111 Tree 55
UI adjustments 109 trend display 86
Start 31, 177, 184 Trend display 84, 233
Start value 145 Type name 39, 61
Step value 147
Structured Text (ST) 109
supported instruction set 113
supported notations 114 U
Subchart 100
Subtract 135 UFB
Subtrahend 135 importing inputs and outputs 103
Switching between Control Flow and Data Flow 48 Unit 73
Syntax 73 User Information 186
User interface 12
User-defined funcion block (UFB) 99
User-Defined Structures 119
T
Tab 13, 25, 27, 27, 231, 232, 238, 239, 241, 244, 244,
245 V
Tab view 18
Tangent 160 Variables 239
Task 41 View 33, 54, 181
assignment CP-80xx 203
assignment CP-8050 204
cycle time CP-80xx 203
properties CP-8050 205
W
Task assignment CP-80xx 203
Task assignment CP-8050 204 Warning indication 79, 79
Task card 13, 16 Width 56
Task cycle-time CP-80xx 203 WORD 118
Task level 41 Working area 13, 16
Task properties CP-8050 205 Working Area 19
Task sequence 41
Terminal 73, 194
Testing 241
charts CP-80xx 214
charts CP-8050 220
in synchronized and non-synchronized state 209
input wiring CP-80xx 211
input wiring CP-8050 218
output wiring CP-80xx 216
output wiring CP-8050 221
signals 205
Testing Signals 205
Text 63, 176, 176, 191
Text box 63, 65, 65
Text Box 175, 190
Background 190
Text field 176, 191
TIME 118
Time delay 142, 143
Time intervals 143

254 SICAM, Logic Editor, Help

, Edition 02.2022